◁ 返回 FileEditSearchHelp CD 11 — 图形,图象 2#
软件列表
Disc :CD 11 — 图形,图象 2#
Total :100 个软件
RAW = 标准磁盘映像,可直接用于虚拟机 (VM) 或写入软盘 | IMG/DDI = 原始压缩格式 (HDCOPY/DiskDupe),需专用工具读取
000 Harvard Graphics V2.0 10×TD
哈佛作图
001 Micrografx Designer V3.1 5×TD
002 Micrografx Designer V4.0 12×TD
艺术及广告绘图,带有各行业的图形符号
003 DESIGN VIEW V2.0C 2×HD
004 DESIGN CENTER V5.1 7×HD
README.DOC [展开]
			THE DESIGN CENTER 5.1


1.0)   Introduction
                                         
       This file describes the new features and changes for the 5.1
       release of the Design Center programs: PSpice, Probe, 
       Stimulus Editor, and Parts.  The platforms covered in this 
       file include: non-windows IBM-PC and NEC-PC with DOS/16M, 
       Windows 3.0 IBM-PC and NEC-PC, Macintosh, Sun, DECstation,
       and VAX/VMS.  Most of the material in this file will direct 
       you to the location in the analysis manuals where detailed 
       information on each subject can be found.
       
       The analysis documentation referenced in this README.DOC 
       consists of the following manuals:
       
       "Analysis System Setup Manual"
       "Analysis User's Guide"
       "Analysis Reference Manual"


2.0)   PSpice

2.1)   DOS Only / Install Program for PSpice
       
       The installation program used to install PSpice, INSTALL, is 
       licensed software provided by Knowledge Dynamics Corporation, 
       P.O. Box 1558, Canyon Lake, Texas 78130-1558 (USA).  INSTALL 
       is Copyright (c) 1987-1992 by Knowledge Dynamics Corporation
       which reserves all copyright protection worldwide.  INSTALL 
       is provided to you for the exclusive purpose of installing 
       PSpice.  MicroSim Corporation is exclusively responsible for 
       the support of PSpice, including support during the 
       installation phase.  In no event will Knowledge Dynamics 
       Corporation be able to provide any technical support for 
       PSpice.

2.2)   Table 4 on page 52 of the Analysis Reference Manual
       lists two new intrinsic functions for PSpice expressions.  
       Please refer to the manual for detailed information regarding
       the results of each expression.

       The new functions are:

       TABLE(x,x1,y1,x2,y2,...xn,yn)       

       LIMIT(x,min,max)              


2.3)   To link the DOS/16M version, you must use the Microsoft 
       segment-executable linker that comes with the Microsoft C 
       compiler.  To link the DOS version, we recommend that you 
       use the Plink86plus linker (version 2.24) from Intersolve.  
       For more information contact:

                 Life Boat Distribution Services
                 1163 Shrewsbury Avenue
                 Shrewsbury, New Jersey 07702
                 (800) 445-7899


2.4)   Fourier Analysis  (.FOUR command)

       The .FOUR command for Fourier analysis now allows an
       argument to specify the number of harmonics you wish
       to have calculated.  

       The general format is:
              
       .FOUR <frequency value> [no. harmonics value] <output variable>*

       For example:
              
       .FOUR 60Hz 20 V(17)

       If the number of harmonics is not specified, the DC
       component, fundamental, and 2nd through 9th harmonics
       are calculated by default.

       Refer to Chapter Three, page 62 of the Analysis Reference 
       Manual for information on the .FOUR command.


2.5)   Lossy Transmission Line Model

       A Lossy Transmission Line model has been implemented in 
       version 5.1.  Using the distributed model approach rather
       than the the traditional lumped model approach allows you
       to simulate lossy lines in a significantly reduced amount
       of time.  

       
       The general format is:

       T<name>        <A port (+) node>  <A port (-) node>
       +              <B port (+) node>  <B port (-) node>
       +              LEN=<value> R=<value> L=<value>
       +              G=<value> C=<value>
       
       For examples refer to Chapter Four, page 127 "Transmission 
       Line" (T device), of the Analysis Reference Manual.       


2.6)   Device Libraries


2.6.1) Digital Library Additions

       The new library files added to the Digital Library are:
       
       dig_pal.lib   -  Programmable Array Logic devices
       Note: PAL20RA10 is listed in the library list,
       but is not currently available in this library.

       dig_gal.lib   -  Generic Array Logic devices

       dig_ecl.lib   -  Emitter Coupled Logic 10K and 100K devices
       Note: 100181 is listed in the library list, but is not 
       currently available in this library.

       The devices and their pin lists are provided in tables in the 
       Analysis Reference Manual.  These tables can be found at the 
       end of Chapter Five on pages 288-292.


2.6.2) Analog Library Additions 

       The following libraries have been added to the 5.1 version 
       of PSpice:

       europe.lib    -  European-manufactured semiconductor devices

       harris.lib    -  RCA/GE/Harris power-transistor devices

       swit_rav.lib  -  Averaging power supply devices
       Note:  The Average Power Supply Model VMSSDCM is listed in
       the library list, but is not currently available in this 
       library.

2.6.2.1) EUROPE.LIB

       Some of the devices in EUROPE.LIB and their counterparts in
       the regular libraries (eg. DIODE.LIB) have identical names.  
       In order for PSpice to find the correct model/subcircuit 
       definition, you must ensure that the appropriate library is 
       specified first in NOM.LIB.

       If EUROPE.LIB is specified before another model library
       containing duplicate names, none of the duplicate devices
       in the second library will be accessed.  Therefore, if
       D1N4148 and D1N4149 exist in both EUROPE.LIB and DIODE.LIB, 
       PSpice would take both the D1N4148 and D1N4149 definitions
       from EUROPE.LIB which is listed before DIODE.LIB in NOM.LIB.
       To avoid this from happening you can extract the specific
       devices from the desired libraries and put them into a library
       that is listed before any other library containing the device
       with the duplicate name.

       If you are using Schematics, the order of symbol libraries
       specified in the [SCHEMATICS LIBS] section of msim.ini should
       reflect the order of model libraries specified in NOM.LIB.


2.7)   Inertial and Transport Delay

       PSpice uses two different types of internal delay functions when 
       simulating the digital portion of the circuit: "inertial delay" 
       and "transport delay".  The application of these concepts is 
       embodied within the implementation of the digital primitives 
       within PSpice.  Therefore, they are not user-selectable.

       To obtain detailed information on Inertial and Transport Delay,
       please refer to the Analysis Reference Manual, Chapter Four, 
       Section 4.8.4.4 (pages 100-101).
       
       
2.8)   Digital Worst-case Timing Simulation

       With "digital worst-case timing simulation" (new for the
       5.1 release), you will be able to use PSpice to evaluate
       the timing behavior of your digital and mixed analog/digital
       designs using a full range of component propagation delay 
       tolerances.  In Chapter Five of the Analysis User's Guide
       you will find information on digital worst-case timing 
       simulation, starting with Section 5.5
       on page 135.  The remaining sections and their subjects are:
       
       5.5.1    Simulator Representation of Timing Ambiguity
       5.5.2    Simulator Propagation of Timing Ambiguity
       5.5.3    Identification of Timing Hazards
       5.5.3.1  Convergence Hazard
       5.5.3.2  Critical Hazard
       5.5.3.3  Cumulative Ambiguity Hazard
       5.5.3.4  Reconvergence Hazard
       5.5.4    Glitch Suppression Due to Inertial Delay
       5.5.5    Methodology
              
        
2.9)   PSpice as a Native Windows 3.0 Program on the IBM-PC and NEC-PC

       The general operating instructions for Windows PSpice as a 
       native Windows 3.0 program can be found in Chapter Two, 
       Section 2.3.1.2, (pages 16-20) of the Analysis Reference Manual.  
       
       Windows PSpice will run on any IBM 386 or 486 based PC, IBM-PC 
       compatible computers, or NEC-PC running the Design Center 
       package with schematic capture.  This program requires a 
       minimum of one megabyte of memory available in the Windows 
       environment, plus the amount needed to run your particular 
       circuit files. 


2.9.1) Windows PSpice Menus

       To assist you in navigating through the Windows PSpice menus
       here is a list of the new menus and the commands within each.
       
       (a)  HELP MENU
       
            About PSpice... 
       

       (b)  FILE MENU

            Open 
            Terminate Simulation 
            Save Window Configuration 
            Exit to Windows 
       

       (c)  FONT MENU

            System 
            ANSI Fixed 
            ANSI Variable 
            OEM 
            Other Fonts... 
       

       (d)  COLOR MENU

            Text Color 
            Background Color 
            Error Text Color 
            Error Background Color 
       
       (e)  DISPLAY MENU

            Immediate 
            Fast 
            Slow 
       
3.0)   Probe

3.1)   Analog and Digital Plots

       For the 5.0 and earlier releases of Probe, you could have 
       0, 1, or more analog plots, and 0 or 1 digital plots.

       For the 5.1 release of Probe, you can have 0, 1, or several 
       plots.  Each plot can be analog only, digital only, or both 
       analog and digital.  When a plot is both analog and digital, 
       the analog traces are displayed in the bottom part of the 
       plot with a dashed border, and the digital traces are 
       displayed in the top part of the plot with a solid border.

       When you start Probe with a .dat file that has both analog and 
       digital data, an empty analog plot is shown.  After adding 
       traces, the plot will have both analog and digital parts if 
       both analog and digital traces have been displayed.

       Digital plot size is now specified as a percentage of the 
       overall plot size.  In Probe 5.0, there was only one digital 
       plot and the digital plot size was specified as the number of 
       digital traces the digital plot could display.

3.2)   Menus
        
       The menus have been modified to improve the command flow for
       displaying both analog and digital waveforms on the same plot.  
       The Analog Plot Menu and the Digital Plot Menu are now combined.  
       This new menu structure includes the digital_Trace_commands 
       which allow the user to move, insert, change, and scroll 
       digital traces.

        
3.3)   Remove_trace
                
       Changes have been made to allow one or more traces to be
       selected for removal, before actually removing the traces
       (and doing the sometimes time consuming redraw of the
       display).

       The traces to be removed may be selected by using either the
       mouse or the arrow keys and space bar.  Selected traces are 
       marked with a '<' to the right of the trace name
       e.g. V(4)< ).

       Using the mouse:
                 Clicking on the trace name the first time selects 
		 the trace.
                 Clicking on the trace again deselects it.
       
       Using the arrow keys and space bar:
                 When select is chosen, the first trace is 
		 highlighted.  The right and left arrows will 
		 move the highlight to other trace names.  
		 The space bar selects/deselects the trace.

       Also, an Undelete command has been added.  It will redisplay
       the last trace(s) deleted since entering the Remove_trace menu.
       Undelete only appears in the menu if traces have been deleted
       since entering the Remove_trace menu.

       NOTE: because of these changes, Probe command files created by
       Probe 5.0 or earlier, will no longer work for deleting traces.


3.4)   Add Trace

       Add_trace now allows you to specify analog traces, digital 
       traces, or both at the same time.  You cannot create an 
       expression that combines analog and digital nodes to create 
       one trace.

       Digital expressions have been added, and the syntax for 
       specifying a bus has changed.  

       A digital signal can be any digital node in the data file or
       a boolean expression involving digital nodes.  Please see 
       page 312 of the Analysis Reference Manual for information 
       on digital signals and digital expressions.


3.5)   Goal function search commands:

       Limited expressions have been added for LEVEL(val),
       and XVALUE(val).

       In 5.0, val could be:
                 a floating number  (e.g., 1e5, 100n, 1, ...)
                 a percent (eg 50%)
                 a marked point (e.g., x1, y1, ...)

       In 5.1, val can also be:
                 a db value relative to max or min
                  max-3db or -3db => 3db below maximum range
                  min+3db or  3db => 3db above minimum range
                 a value relative to max or min
                  max-3 => maximum range - 3
                  min+3 => minimum range + 3
                 a relative db value
                  .-3db => 3db below lastvalue
                  .+3db => 3db above lastvalue
                 a relative value
                   .-3   => lastvalue - 3
                   .+3   => lastvalue + 3

       where lastvalue is the x or y value found by the last search 
       command.  For the first search command, lastvalue is the 
       starting point for the first search command.

       Refer to page 320 of the Analysis Reference Manual for
       more information on Search_commands.


3.6)   Probe as a Native Windows 3.0 Program on the IBM-PC and NEC-PC
              
       Probe running as a Windows 3.0 application, is only available 
       in the Design Center package with schematic capture.  Windows 
       Probe provides similar functionality included in non-windows 
       Probe, implemented by utilizing pull-down menus and dialog 
       boxes.
       
       To help you locate Probe functions, the following Windows
       Probe main menus and their command items are provided.   For
       details on the command defintions see Chapter Six, Section 
       6.3.2.1 (page 342) of the Analysis Reference Manual.

       
       FILE MENU          ANALYSIS MENU           TRACE MENU
       
       Load                 AC                    Add  
       Print                DC                    Remove
       Printer Setup        Transient             Macro
       Log Commands                               Symbols
       Run Commands                               Mark Data Points
       Exit
       About Probe
              
       
       AXIS MENU          ZOOM MENU                CURSOR MENU
       
       Set Range          Display Pointer          Display
       Add Y              Normal                   Peak
       Delete Y           In                       Trough
       Color              Out                      Slope
       Title              Area                     Min
       Y Log Scale                                 Max
       X Log Scale                                 Search Commands
       X Variable                                  Next Transition
       Restrict Data                               Previous Transition
       Fourier
       Performance Analysis


       DISPLAY MENU
        
       Digital Plot Size
       Save/Restore
       Copy to Clipboard
       Redraw

       In general, all commands are available at all times, provided
       that the command makes sense.  For instance, Remove in the 
       trace menu is enabled only when there are traces to remove.

       Some options, such as Fourier, are toggles which can be 
       either on or off.  On is denoted by a check mark next to the 
       command, and off is denoted by the absence of the check mark.

       Some commands require some prior action before they will work.

       Trace Remove:  You must first select the traces to remove.
       This is done by pointing at the name of the trace in the
       legend and clicking the left mouse button.  You may
       select multiple traces by holding down the shift key while
       selecting the trace names.

       Zoom commands: You must enable the zoom pointer before you
       zoom in or out.  You may move the zoom pointer with the
       mouse by clicking over a point of interest.  Zooming in
       and out works by a factor of two around the zoom pointer.
       If you "click and drag" (press and hold the mouse button,
       move the mouse, release the button), you can define an
       area to zoom into using the Zoom Area command.  Zoom Normal
       is always available.

       Cursor commands: You must display the cursors before you can
       use any cursor commands.  If the command has implied
       direction, such as Peak, then the direction moved is the
       same as the last direction moved, or right if there was no
       last direction.  Likewise, the cursor moved will be the same
       as the last cursor moved.  Next Transition and Previous
       Transition are not available in the beta version.

       Features not available through the menus:

       Digital Scrolling:  To scroll the digital plot, use the mouse
       to click on the "+" signs in the digital legend.  They will
       only appear if there are additional digital traces not 
       currently displayed.

       Compatibility with non-windows Probe:

       Log/Command Files:  These are specific to the windows version.

       Macro Files (.mac): Compatible

       Display Files (.dsp): Compatible

       Data Files (.dat): Compatible

       Data Files (.txt): CSDF data files are not available in the
       beta version. 
        
       Goal Function Files (.gf): Compatible


4.0)   Parts

       If you are running on an NEC-PC or IBM-PC (or compatible)
       then you will need 510 kilobytes of conventional memory free 
       to run Parts.

4.1)   Non-linear Magnetic Core Model

       A non-linear magnetic core model has been added and uses
       a derivative of the Jiles-Atherton formulation to provide
       a closed-form, analytic solution.   For detailed information
       please refer to Chapter Eight, page 414, of the Analysis
       Reference Manual.
005 MICROGRAFX CHARISMA V2.1 9×HD
006 MICRO KITCHEN COMPANION F/W 2×TD
007 MICROGRAFX GRAPHICS WORKS F/W 12×HD
008 LOTUS Free Lance For Windows 10×TD
README.TXT [展开]
Adobe Type Manager (R) version 2.5    Release Notes
Windows version
October 28, 1992

Adobe Type Manager is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated 
registered in certain countries.  Copyrights 1983-1992 Adobe 
Systems Incorporated.  All Rights Reserved.  Patents Pending


This document supplements the Adobe Type Manager User Guide.
Topics include:

1.   Disk Contents
2.   Installation Requirements
3.   What's New in Version 2.5
4.   ATM.INI
5.   ATM Control Panel
6.   PostScript Soft Fonts Listed in ATM Control Panel
7.   Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts Option
8.   Print ATM Fonts as Graphics
9.   Install as Autodownload fonts for the PostScript driver
10.  ATM and Printing
11.  Printer and Video Drivers
12.  Installing Fonts from the Adobe PlusPack and Adobe 
     PostScript and Type Cartridges
13.  Installing ATM in the IBM OS/2 Windows Compatibility Box
14.  Application Notes
      - Adobe Illustrator 4.0
      - Corel Draw
      - Designer 3.1 and Charisma 2.1
      - FaceLift
      - Harvard Draw 1.0
      - Harvard Graphics 1.0 for Windows
      - Micrografx PostScript Driver
      - Norton Desktop for Windows 1.0
      - Quattro Pro for Windows 1.0
      - TypeAlign 2.0
      - Various Applications with Draft Mode Printing Feature 
      - Various Font Management Utilities
      - Virus Protection Software
      - Word for Windows 2.0 and 2.0a
      - WordPerfect for Windows 5.1
15.  Novell Netware Considerations
16.  ATM and IBM 4029 Series Printers
17.  Troubleshooting
18.  Acknowledgments
 A.  ATM.INI parameters


1.   Disk Contents

The following files are found on your ATM disk(s):

ATM16.DLL            Program file for Windows Standard mode
ATM32.DLL            Program file for Windows 386 Enhanced mode
ATMSYS.DRV           ATM System driver
ATMCNTRL.EXE         ATM Control Panel
INSTALL.EXE          ATM Installer
INSTALL.CNF          ATM installation configuration file
PROGDISK (FONTDISK)  Disk ID file
README.TXT           This README file
ATM.CNF              Configuration file (might not be present on 
                     upgrade disks)
FONTINST.TXT         Font installation instructions for Adobe 
                     Font Foundry, LaserTools PrimeType, and 
                     the IBM OS/2 Windows Compatibility Box 
                     (present on special ATM upgrade disk)                     

Your disk(s) might also contain a PSFONTS directory and a 
PCLFONTS directory.  The PSFONTS directory contains PostScript 
Font Outline (PFB) files and Printer Font Metrics (PFM) files.  
The PCLFONTS directory contains PCL bitmapped font files, which 
have filename extensions of either SFP or SFL.  The PCLFONTS 
directory also contains Printer Font Metrics (PFM) files.


2.   Installation Requirements

To install ATM, you need a c:\ drive and sufficient disk space 
for the ATM software and fonts.  The amount of disk space you 
need depends on the number of fonts included with your ATM 
package.  The standard retail ATM package requires about 1.2 
megabytes of free disk space.  The default directory for the 
PostScript fonts is c:\psfonts.  You can, however, install the 
font files in any directory on any drive.


3.   What's New in Version 2.5

Version 2.5 of ATM introduces three new features:

* ATM now uses soft fonts that are created on-the-fly by certain 
  Windows 3.1 printer drivers; this feature speeds printing for 
  PCL printers and other printers with drivers that support soft 
  font creation
* ATM now adds and removes fonts without requiring that you 
  restart Windows
* When you install fonts, ATM lets you specify whether or not 
  the fonts are automatically downloaded to PostScript printers 
  when you print

The following paragraphs briefly describe these new features.

*   When running with Windows 3.1, ATM 2.5 prints soft fonts for 
    printers whose drivers support on-the-fly soft font 
    creation.  These printers include the HP LaserJet family of 
    printers and IBM Lexmark printers.  This feature does not 
    work with all printers that support downloaded printer soft 
    fonts.  The printer's Windows 3.1 printer driver must also 
    support on-the-fly soft font creation for this feature to 
    work.  To determine whether a Windows 3.1 printer driver 
    supports on-the-fly soft font creation, check the Printer 
    Setup Options dialog box in the Windows Printer Control 
    Panel.  If you do not see a "Print TrueType as Graphics" 
    option, the driver most likely cannot create printer soft 
    fonts on-the-fly.

*   ATM 2.5 now adds and removes fonts without requiring that 
    you restart Windows.  When you use ATM to add and remove 
    fonts while other applications are running, however, the ATM 
    font changes are not always automatically available in the 
    application font menus.  Some applications, such as Windows 
    Write and Lotus 1-2-3 for Windows, update their available 
    font lists immediately, while others, such as Lotus AmiPro 
    3.0 and Aldus PageMaker 4.0, require that you re-select your 
    printer before the ATM font changes appear in font menus.  A 
    few applications, such as Adobe Illustrator 4.0 and 
    QuattroPro for Windows 1.0, build their font menus when they 
    are started.  You must restart these applications to see ATM 
    font changes in their font menus.

*   When you add or remove fonts, the ATM 2.5 Control Panel 
    automatically adds and removes soft font entries from the 
    [PostScript, portname] sections in WIN.INI.  (The 
    [PostScript, portname] sections contain settings for 
    PostScript printers.)  If you change printer ports, however, 
    Windows creates a new [PostScript, portname] section and 
    does not transfer font entries from other sections.  You 
    must reinstall your fonts to add soft font entries to the 
    new [PostScript, portname] section. See "Install As 
    Autodownload Fonts for the PostScript Driver" later in this 
    README files for details.


A number of additional changes have been made in version 2.5:

*   ATM defers to resident and cartridge DeskJet fonts when you 
    use the Windows 3.1 DeskJet driver that works with the 
    Universal Printer driver.
*   ATM no longer disables application printing when you use the 
    Windows 3.1 Generic Text driver (TTY.DRV). This driver 
    supports only a single internal font.
*   Rotated text in graphics now displays correctly in Lotus 
    1-2-3 for Windows.
*   ATM text in Lotus Freelance now prints correctly when any 
    Windows 3.1 PCL printer driver is set up to print at lower 
    print resolutions.
*   ATM now prints correctly to PCL printers when used with 
    Aldus IntelliDraw.
*   The ATM 2.5 Installer installs ATM correctly when MoreFonts 
    is present on the system.


4.   ATM.INI

ATM's initialization file, ATM.INI, is created during 
installation.  It contains a list of fonts installed in ATM and 
other ATM program-related settings.  See Appendix A at the end 
of this README file for more technical information.


5.   ATM Control Panel

There is no longer a pre-defined limit to the number of fonts 
you can install with the ATM Control Panel.  Windows does, 
however, limit initialization files (including the ATM.INI and 
the WIN.INI) to a size of 64K.  If this limit is reached, 
Windows cannot open, read, or write properly to these INI files.

For Windows 3.0 and 3.0a, Microsoft recommends keeping 
initialization files smaller than 32k in size.  Following this 
recommendation, the maximum number of fonts that can be listed 
in ATM.INI for Windows 3.0 or 3.0a is around 450 fonts.  For 
Windows 3.1, the only limit is the 64K maximum file size, which 
is large enough for about 900 fonts.

Many applications limit the number of fonts that can be 
displayed in their font menus.  For example, an application font 
menu might show only 200 fonts even though you have installed 
more than 200 ATM fonts.

The more fonts you add with ATM, the longer it takes Windows to 
start.  The exact time required for Windows to start depends on 
the type of processor you have and your system configuration.  
To reduce the time it takes Windows to start, make more memory 
available to Windows by, for example, removing Terminate and 
Stay Resident (TSR) programs.  You can also reduce the time it 
takes Windows to start by removing ATM fonts you use 
infrequently.


6.   PostScript Soft Font Limits for Windows 3.0 and 3.0a

For Windows 3.1, there is no longer a 150 font limit on the 
number of soft-font entries you can have for a PostScript 
printer.  For Windows 3.0 and 3.0a, however, the maximum number 
of soft-font entries per PostScript printer WIN.INI entry is 
approximately 150.  The exact number depends on your particular 
system configuration.  If you receive spurious printer-related 
error messages when starting Windows or switching to a 
PostScript printer, you might have too many soft font entries in 
the printer's WIN.INI entry.  To correct the problem, try using 
the ATM Control Panel to remove soft fonts you don't normally 
use.

If you manually remove soft-font entries from the PostScript 
printer section of the WIN.INI file, remember to adjust the line 
"softfonts=nn" to show the new total number of soft-font 
entries.  The ATM Control Panel automatically renumbers soft-
font entries in WIN.INI when you remove fonts.  ATM cannot, 
however, correct misnumbered font entries.

The Microsoft Windows 3.1 PostScript driver lets you use a 
synthesized italic style for a PostScript font even if the 
outline font (PFB) file for the italic font is not present on 
this system.  Windows, however, cannot provide the PostScript 
driver with the correct font metrics for a synthesized italic 
face, so the font is displayed with expanded character spacing.  
Also, PostScript printers print the Roman (non-italic) face for 
the synthesized italic face when you print.


7.   Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts

When you select the Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts option, ATM 
lets PCL printer drivers use pre-built or printer-resident fonts 
to print documents. When you clear the Use Pre-built or Resident 
Fonts check box, ATM creates characters for PCL printer drivers 
to print even when pre-built or printer-resident fonts are 
available.

Although ATM does not require that you restart Windows after you 
change the Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts option, you might 
have to quit and restart applications for this option to take 
effect.

If you are using Windows 3.1 with printer drivers that allow 
soft fonts to be created on-the-fly (such as the PCL drivers), 
you might want to turn this option off to speed printing.  It is 
more efficient for a printer driver to create a soft font on-
the-fly than to download a pre-built font.  You can see if you 
have any pre-built fonts installed for your PCL printer by 
checking the printer driver's Fonts dialog box. To display the 
driver's Fonts dialog box, choose Fonts in the driver's Printer 
Setup dialog box.

When Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts option is selected, you 
might find the characters of a printer-resident or soft font 
that you place beneath a graphic image print on top of the 
image.  To see an example of this problem, open an application 
that lets you draw images over text, select the Courier font, 
type some text, and draw a gray box on top of the text.  The 
font is covered by the gray box on the screen.  Now print with 
the Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts option selected to see if 
your printer prints the text on top of the gray box.  If the 
text prints on top of the box, you will also have this problem 
when you turn ATM off.  To correct this problem, clear the Use 
Pre-built or Resident Fonts check box.

If you are using a printer driver that creates soft fonts on-
the-fly (such as the PCL printer drivers), you might have to 
select the "Print ATM fonts as graphics" option for graphic 
objects and text to print correctly.


8.   Print ATM Fonts as Graphics

For Windows 3.1 and later, ATM takes advantage of a new feature 
available with some printer drivers that lets ATM use the driver 
to create soft fonts on-the-fly.  Creating soft fonts on-the-fly 
speeds printing.  Printer drivers that create soft fonts on-the-
fly include the drivers for the HP LaserJet family of printers 
and the driver for the IBM Lexmark printers.

The Print ATM Fonts as Graphics option controls whether or not 
ATM uses the soft font creation feature when it is available.  
By default, the Print ATM Fonts as Graphics option is cleared 
and ATM uses the soft font creation feature.  When you select 
the Print ATM Fonts as Graphics option, however, ATM prints 
characters as graphics. Selecting the Print ATM Fonts as 
Graphics option can solve some printing problems, such as when 
the text you place beneath a graphic image prints on top of the 
graphic.

When you change the Print ATM Fonts as Graphics option while 
other applications are running, the change usually takes effect 
immediately.  In a few applications, such as Word for Windows 
2.0 for example, you must re-select your printer before the ATM 
print mode change takes effect.

If you set up your printer driver to print TrueType fonts as 
graphics, ATM prints fonts as graphics regardless of how the 
Print ATM Fonts as Graphics option is set.

Some applications, such as CorelDraw 3.0, always print text as 
graphics.


9.   Install As Autodownload Fonts for the PostScript Driver

The Microsoft PostScript printer driver uses the [PostScript, 
portname] section in the WIN.INI file to find the PostScript 
soft fonts installed on the system.  As an example, the 
following [PostScript, portname] section shows two soft fonts 
installed for a PostScript printer connected to the parallel 
port LPT1.

[PostScript, LPT1]
softfonts=2
softfont1=c:\psfonts\pfm\tkrg______.pfm;c:\psfonts\tkrg____.pfb
softfont2=c:\psfonts\pfm\tkb_______.pfm;c:\psfonts\tkb_____.pfb

Each of these soft font entries is made up of two parts:

* The first part is the path and file name of the soft font's 
  printer font metrics (PFM) file

* The second part is the path and file name of the soft font's 
  outline (PFB) file

The PFM file part is necessary for all PostScript fonts whose 
character metrics are not hard-coded in the PostScript driver.  
The PFB file part is needed only when you want the driver to 
download the font outline with every print job.

To set up the Microsoft PostScript driver to automatically 
download a font at print time, install the font with the 
"Install as autodownload fonts for the PostScript driver" option 
selected.  When this option is selected, ATM adds both the PFM 
and PFB parts of the soft font entry.

You must also select the "Install as autodownload fonts for the 
PostScript driver" option if you are installing the standard 
Base35 fonts for a printer that does not contain them.  The 
Base35 fonts (available with the Adobe PlusPack and the 
PostScript Type Cartridge) are: AvantGarde, Bookman, Courier, 
Helvetica, Helvetica Narrow, NewCenturySchoolbook, Palatino, 
Symbol, Times, ZapfChancery, and ZapfDingbats.  Most, but not 
all, newer PostScript printers contain the Base35 fonts.

If you are adding fonts to ATM that are already resident in the 
printer, you can uncheck this option to instruct the printer 
driver not to send the font outline files to the printer at 
print time.  With the "Install as autodownload fonts for the 
PostScript driver" option unchecked, ATM adds only the PFM part 
of the soft-font entries in WIN.INI. You should also uncheck 
this option for fonts you plan to manually download to the 
printer.

How ATM 2.5 Adds Base35 Fonts

When the "Install as autodownload fonts for the PostScript 
driver" option is unchecked, ATM does not add soft font entries 
to WIN.INI for the Base35 soft fonts.  The soft font entries for 
these fonts are not needed because the font metrics for these 
fonts are hard-coded in the driver.  If soft font entries for 
the Base35 fonts are present in WIN.INI, however, they are 
ignored by the PostScript driver at print time if the Base35 
fonts are resident in the printer.  In other words, the 
PostScript driver does not download the outlines of these fonts 
if they are already present on the printer.  The only exception 
to this rule is for the Bookman font.  If a Bookman PFB entry is 
present in the WIN.INI, the driver downloads the outline file at 
print time.  To correct this problem and to force the driver to 
use the Bookman font resident in the printer, re-add the four 
faces of Bookman with the "Install as autodownload fonts for the 
PostScript driver" option unchecked


10.  ATM and Printing

ATM uses PostScript outline fonts to produce a smooth graphic 
display of your fonts on-screen.  The fonts available for use 
depend on the printer you have selected in your application.

The fonts available for non-PostScript printers are the printer-
resident fonts, the Windows internal bitmapped fonts, the 
TrueType fonts installed on the system (for Windows 3.1), and 
the PostScript fonts listed in the ATM Control Panel. 

For PostScript printers, the fonts available are the printer-
resident fonts, the TrueType fonts installed on the system (for 
Windows 3.1), and the PostScript soft-font entries listed in the 
printer's [PostScript, portname] section in the WIN.INI file.  
When you print to a PostScript printer, ATM does not have to be 
active because it does not have to rasterize any fonts.  Windows 
and the PostScript driver download outline fonts to your 
PostScript printer.

Print Resolution

For the highest print quality, Adobe recommends you set up your 
printer to print at the highest resolution available.  Certain 
PCL printer drivers do not properly set the print resolution.  
They might appear to be set at 300 dpi resolution in the Windows 
Printer Control Panel even though they are set to a lower 
resolution.  Some applications fail to print correctly when your 
PCL printer resolution is not set to 300 dpi.  Excel 3.0a, for 
example, prints blank cells instead of ATM fonts when printing 
ATM fonts as graphics and your PCL printer is not set to 300 
dpi.  If you suspect your PCL printer driver is not set to 300 
dpi, set the resolution to 75 dpi, save this option, and then 
set the resolution back to 300 dpi.  When your printer 
resolution is set to 300 dpi, the line "prtresfac=0" appears in 
the PCL printer entry in the WIN.INI file.

Colored Text

ATM generates a graphic image of colored text regardless of the 
ATM print mode (soft font or graphics) set with the Print ATM 
Fonts as Graphics option.  To force ATM to generate black or 
white soft fonts for monochrome printers and color soft fonts 
for printers such as the HP PaintJet 300xl, add the following 
[Colors] section to your ATM.INI file.

[Colors]
PrintColorGraphics=Off

See Appendix A for a description of this setting.  Be very 
careful when you change ATM.INI. If you make a mistake, you can 
make it impossible for ATM to start.


11.  Printer and Video Drivers

For the highest font rasterization quality, Adobe recommends you 
use the latest Windows printer and video drivers.  If you are 
using the Microsoft Windows 3.1 DeskJet driver version 1.2, make 
sure to use the Universal Printer driver dated 06/29/92. 


12.  Installing Fonts from the Adobe PlusPack and Adobe
     PostScript and Type Cartridges

Installing fonts from the Adobe PlusPack or for the Adobe 
PostScript or Adobe Type Cartridge requires that you insert the 
different font disks many times.  To avoid having to repeatedly 
insert font disks, follow these steps:

  1. Create a temporary directory on your hard disk.

  2. Copy all the files from all the font disks to the temporary 
     directory.

  3. Start the ATM Control Panel and choose Add. The Add ATM 
     Fonts dialog box appears.

  4. Using the Directories list box, open the temporary 
     directory.  The names of all the fonts appear in the 
     Available Fonts list.

  5. Select the fonts you want to add and either accept the 
     default target directories or enter the names of the 
     PostScript font directories you are using.

  6. Choose Add.  The fonts are added and you are returned to 
     the ATM Control Panel.

  7. Choose OK to close the ATM Control Panel.

  8. Delete all the files in the temporary directory; then 
     delete the temporary directory.


13.  Installing ATM in the IBM OS/2 Windows Compatibility Box

Before installing ATM version 2.5 over an existing version of 
ATM in the IBM OS/2 Windows Compatibility box, you must first 
edit the Boot section of your Windows SYSTEM.INI file.  Replace 
the two lines 

  SYSTEM.DRV=ATMSYS.DRV
  ATM.SYSTEM.DRV=SYSTEM.DRV

with this line

  SYSTEM.DRV=SYSTEM.DRV

After changing the SYSTEM.INI file, start Windows and install 
ATM as instructed in the manual.  Be very careful changing the 
SYSTEM.INI file.  If you make a make a mistake, you can make it 
impossible for Windows to start.


14.  Application Notes

When you add or remove a font while an application is active, 
the application font menus are not always updated automatically. 
If you add or remove a font while one of the following 
applications is active,

  AmiPro 3.0, Freehand 3.0, Freelance 1.0, PageMaker 4.0, 
  Ventura Publisher for Windows, and WordPerfect 5.1.for 
  Windows 

you must re-select your printer to update the application's font 
menu.

Adobe Illustrator 4.0 

If you have Illustrator 4.0 and add or remove a font, you must 
restart Windows for font changes to take effect in Illustrator.

If you are using the latest version of the Adobe Enumerator, you 
need only restart Illustrator to see ATM font changes.  Make 
sure Illustrator is closed, however, before using ATM to add or 
remove fonts.

The two enumerator files PSENUM.DLL and RUN_ENUM.EXE, which 
Illustrator uses to register ATM font changes, are located in 
the Windows system directory.  If your enumerator files are 
dated 7/17/92 or earlier, you need to obtain the most recent 
versions of these files.  You can receive the updates to these 
files free of charge by contacting Adobe Customer Support at 
(415) 961-4992.  You can also download these files from the 
Adobe CompuServe forum.

If you are using Enumerator files dated 7/17/92 or earlier, you 
have to restart Windows for ATM font changes to take effect.


CorelDraw!

CorelDraw! 3.0 now supports ATM fonts.  Adobe strongly 
recommends that you obtain the maintenance release version 3.0b.  
You must restart CorelDraw! for ATM font changes to take effect.  
CorelDraw! version 2.0 does not support ATM fonts.  


Designer 3.1 and Charisma 2.1

The lines used for underlines and strikeouts may appear broken 
when using an ATM font.  This is due the way these Micrografx 
products handle character placement.

If you rotate text at a 90 degree angle and then stretch it, you 
might find that the font will not be properly resized.  To avoid 
this problem, first resize the font and then rotate it.

Rotating stretched text at a 180 degree angle might cause the 
last letters in the text string to overlap.  To correct this 
problem, first rotate the text by 180 degrees and then stretch 
it.

Rotated text at certain angles will sometimes print with 
expanded character spacing on non-PostScript printers.  To 
correct this problem, try using the Print View option and 
selecting the entire page.


FaceLift for Windows

FaceLift for Windows modifies the printer entries in the 
WIN.INI.  If FaceLift is installed, the ATM Installer and 
Control Panel do not recognize the installed PostScript printers 
and cannot add PostScript soft-font entries for these printers.  
Before adding fonts for PostScript printers, you must first 
temporarily disable the "Print with FaceLift" option in FaceLift 
Control Panel.  After the fonts have been installed, you can re-
enable "Print with FaceLift" option.


Harvard Draw 1.01

Harvard Draw 1.01 support ATM fonts.  You must restart the 
application for ATM font changes to take effect.


Harvard Graphics 1.01 for Windows

Harvard Graphics cannot rotate ATM fonts.  Harvard Graphics uses 
its own internal scalable fonts for all rotated text. 

If you are using Harvard Graphics and ATM with a high-resolution 
video driver, you must obtain the maintenance upgrade version 
1.021 or higher.

If you make ATM font changes while Harvard Draw is running, you 
must select another printer driver and switch back to the 
original driver for the ATM font changes to take effect.


Micrografx PostScript Driver

The Micrografx PostScript driver has a non-standard printer 
section structure in the WIN.INI.  PostScript soft fonts cannot 
be installed to this driver using the ATM Installer and Control 
Panel.  You can, however, install your fonts through the 
Micrografx Printer Setup menu.  See your Micrografx manual for 
instructions.


Norton Desktop for Windows 2.0

Due to the different structure of Norton Desktop's application 
groups, the ATM icon might not be properly installed into the 
Main group when you are running Norton as your desktop shell.  
If this occurs, you must manually add the ATM Control Panel 
icon.  The ATM Installer will, however, copy all of the 
necessary files to your system and will configure Windows to run 
ATM.  See the Norton Desktop manual for instructions on how to 
install a new icon in a group.


Quattro Pro for Windows 1.0

You must restart this application for ATM font changes to take 
effect.


PageMaker 4.0

For best results with ATM, set the "Vector text above" and 
"Stretch text above" limits in the Preferences dialog box to 
10000 pixels each.

If you make ATM font changes while PageMaker is running, you 
must re-select your printer for the ATM font changes to take 
effect.


TypeAlign 2.0

If you receive the error message "Application requested abnormal 
termination" after installing TypeAlign under Windows 3.1, you 
must manually remove the entry TALGNDLL.EXE from the load line 
of the WIN.INI file.  TALGNDLL.EXE is not compatible with 
Windows 3.1.  The Load= line in the WIN.INI file is in the 
[windows] section. Be very careful when you change WIN.INI. If 
you make a mistake, Windows will not work correctly.  TypeAlign 
2.1 corrects this problem.


Ventura Publisher Windows Edition 

Adobe recommends using version 4.1.  For upgrade information, 
please contact Ventura at (800) 822-8221.

The fonts Helvetica and Times do not display correctly in 
Reduced View.

If you make ATM font changes while Ventura Publisher is running, 
you must re-select your printer for the ATM font changes to take 
effect.


Word for Windows 2.0a

Double underlines may print as one thick underline at point 
sizes larger than 18 points.  This is due to the method Word for 
Windows uses to perform double underlining.

Smart quotes (characters Alt+0147 and Alt+0148) might print as 
double single quotes with some printer drivers.  The generic 
bullet character (Alt+0149) might print as a lowercase o.


Various Applications with Draft Mode Printing Feature

Some applications which support draft mode printing do not print 
graphics when they print in draft mode.  When ATM is set up to 
print ATM fonts as graphics, text might not print correctly in 
draft mode. To correct this problem, clear the Print ATM Fonts 
as Graphics option in the ATM Control Panel.


Various Font Management Utilities

Some font management utilities such as FontMinder 1.0 and the 
font conversion utility AllType automatically update the ATM.INI 
file.  You must restart Windows for font changes in the ATM.INI 
file introduced by these utilities to take effect.


Virus Protection Software

Some virus protection software packages do not allow the ATM 
Installer to replace previous versions of ATM software.  If you 
have this problem, first scan your hard drive for viruses.  Then 
temporarily disable your virus protection software while you 
install ATM.  Remember to re-enable your virus protection 
software and re-scan your hard disk after installing ATM.


WordPerfect for Windows 5.1

ATM requires the standard Windows printer drivers in order to 
print ATM text.  You cannot print ATM fonts with the WordPerfect 
printer drivers, unless you also use a third-party type utility 
such as PrimeType from LaserTools. 

WordPerfect for Windows uses its own screen fonts for preview, 
so ATM is not active in WordPerfect preview mode

Some special characters in the ANSI character set (with values 
higher than 128) do not print as displayed.  See your Windows 
documentation for the ANSI character set.


15.  Novell Netware Considerations

Although ATM is not a network application, you can print to 
network printers using ATM.  However, you must configure the 
File Contents section in your print job definition to specify 
Byte stream instead of Text.  The Byte stream option is required 
because ATM sends raster graphics to non-PostScript printers.

To add fonts from a network drive, you must first load a 
SHELL.CFG file containing the line "show dots = on".  Use 
IPX.COM to load the SHELL.CFG file.

There is also a 34-character limit for the PostScript target 
directories for the PFB and PFM files.  If your target directory 
name exceeds this limit, use the MAP ROOT command (instead of 
the usual map command) to map the directory to a simulated root 
directory.


16.  ATM and IBM 4029 Series Printers

To use ATM with one of the IBM 4029 series printers, you must 
install version 3.01 or later of the 4029 printer driver and 
version 1.65 or later of the Generic printer driver.  These 
versions are included with Windows 3.1.  If you are using 
Windows 3.0, contact your printer dealer or manufacturer for the 
latest drivers.


17.   Troubleshooting

Justified Text Exceeds Right Margin On Screen

Justified text sometimes extends beyond the right margin on 
screen, but prints correctly.  This happens particularly at 
small point sizes.  Two situations can cause this problem:

*  Windows uses a screen font for a font of a different size.  
   Turning off the Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts option in the
   ATM Control Panel corrects this problem.
*  The problem is caused by round-off errors occurring when an 
   application calculates the total width of a line of text. 
   This problem cannot be corrected.


Documents Containing the Arial MT and TimesNewRomanPS Fonts 
Print Slowly

If, after upgrading to Windows 3.1, you find that documents 
containing the fonts Arial MT and TimesNewRomanPS print more 
slowly on a PostScript printer, you can take the following steps 
to improve printing speed.  These fonts are often used as 
substitutes for the font Helvetica and Times when included when 
ATM is bundled with another product.

To make documents containing Arial MT and TimesNewRomanPS print 
faster, add the following lines to both the [Aliases] section 
and [Synonyms] section of your ATM.INI file.

   Helvetica=Arial MT
   Times=TimesNewRomanPS

The following two lines

   Helv=Arial MT
   Tms Rmn=TimesNewRomanPS

should already be present in both ATM.INI sections.


Helvetica and Times display upside-down.

If the fonts Helvetica and Times display upside-down, check the 
ATM Control Panel to see if all of these fonts are installed:

* Helvetica
* Times
* Arial MT 
* TimesNewRomanPS.

If you have all these fonts, you must manually edit the ATM.INI 
file and replace the following four lines in the [Aliases] and 
[Synonyms] sections

   Helv=Arial MT
   Helvetica=Arial MT
   Tms Rmn=TimesNewRomanPS
   Times=TimesNewRomanPS

with these two lines

   Helv=Helvetica
   Tms Rmn=Times.


18.   Acknowledgments

The ATM team would like to acknowledge the following people who 
have contributed to the design and testing of ATM version 2.5:  
Jeronimo Alves, Geoff Arnold, David Glassman, Jim Gutierrez, 
Curtis Kunz, Jorge Lopez, Sasha Mobley, Sheila Rolfer, Nora 
Sandoval, Scott Seltz, Greg Walker, Nelson Whitney, and Tokuro 
Yamashiro.


Appendix A. ATM.INI Parameters

The following section contains technical information on ATM 
version 2.5's initialization file.  This file is divided up into 
six sections: Fonts, Setup, Settings, Mono, Aliases, and 
Synonyms.

[Fonts]   This section contains a list of all of the fonts 
          installed with ATM and the locations of the PostScript
          PFM and PFB files for each font.  The fonts listed 
          here are available to all non-PostScript printers for 
          screen display and printing.  The fonts available to 
          PostScript printers are based on the PostScript 
          soft-font entries in the specific printer section of 
          the WIN.INI file and the ROM-based fonts in the 
          printer.  If a font is listed in both WIN.INI and 
          ATM.INI, ATM will rasterize the font to the screen.  
          The printing of fonts to PostScript devices is solely 
          the responsibility of the PostScript driver and 
          Windows.  ATM does not have to be active when printing 
          to PostScript devices.

          Although a particular application will allow you to 
          bold or italicize a certain font, your PostScript 
          printer will not be able to render the bold or italic 
          font unless an outline for the bold or italic font is 
          available.  On non-PostScript printers, however, ATM 
          will synthesize a bold, italic or bold italic version 
          of a font based on the roman outline if the outline of 
          the desired font style is not present.

          When the ATM 2.5 Installer creates the [Fonts] section 
          of the ATM.INI, it adds all the PostScript fonts found 
          in the installation disk as well as any PostScript 
          fonts listed as soft-font entries for PostScript 
          printers in the WIN.INI file.  If you are upgrading 
          from a previous version of ATM, the Installer also 
          adds all the fonts listed in the current ATM.INI file.


[Setup]
PFM_Dir   Default PFM directory for the ATM Control Panel when 
          adding PostScript fonts.  
PFB_Dir   Default PFB directory for the ATM Control Panel when 
          adding PostScript fonts.


[Settings]
FontCache=96        Specifies the size of the font cache in 
                    kilobytes.  This option is configurable 
                    through the ATM Control Panel.  The default 
                    is 96k.  Adobe recommends that this value 
                    not be set to more than 64k for each 
                    megabyte of physical memory.  
ATM=On              Determines whether or not ATM is loaded 
                    at Windows startup time.
BitmapFonts=On      This switch is set with the Use Pre-Built or 
                    Resident Fonts check box in the ATM Control 
                    Panel.  When this switch is on, ATM defers 
                    to screen fonts, resident printer fonts, and 
                    printer soft fonts rather than rasterizing 
                    the font itself if the bitmap of the font 
                    requested in available.  If you change this 
                    switch, you do not have to restart Windows 
                    for the change to take effect.  You might, 
                    however, have to restart applications for 
                    the setting to take effect. The default 
                    setting is On.
SynonymPSBegin=9    This value specifies the point size at which 
                    ATM starts using bitmap deferral for font
                    pairs listed in both the Aliases and 
                    Synonyms sections.  The default is 9.  Adobe 
                    recommends that you do not change this 
                    setting.
QLCDir              Indicates the path of the ATM QuickLoad 
                    file, ATMFONTS.QLC.
                    
                    ATMFONTS.QLC contains a list of installed 
                    fonts and font metrics, which reduces 
                    Windows startup time.  You can force ATM to 
                    rebuild this file by deleting the file with 
                    the MS-DOS DEL command and restarting 
                    Windows.
Version=2.5         This value enables the ATM Installer to
                    determine the version of ATM when ATM is not 
                    active; otherwise, the Installer determines
                    the version of ATM from the ATM DLL.
DownloadFonts=On    This switch instructs ATM to print text as 
                    soft fonts for Windows 3.1 printer drivers
                    that support this feature.


[Mono]
Courier=Yes         This section contains a list of monospaced
LetterGothic=Yes    fonts.
PrestigeElite=Yes
Orator=Yes


[Aliases]   This section tells ATM to substitute the font on the 
            right of the equal sign for the font on the left of
            the equal sign when an application requests the font
            on the left of the equal sign.  The ATM Installer
            defines aliases for the fonts Helv, Tms Rmn, 
            Courier, Roman, and Modern.

            When the Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts option is
            turned on, ATM uses the resident bitmapped fonts for
            point sizes for which bitmaps exist. When The Use
            Pre-built or Resident option is turned off, ATM uses
            the PostScript outline font to rasterize all 
            sizes of the aliased bitmapped font.

Helv=Helvetica             The fonts left of the equals sign are
Tms Rmn=Times              Windows bitmapped fonts.  By using
Courier=Courier            PostScript outline fonts, ATM can
                           rasterize a smooth font when these
                           fonts are requested at sizes not
                           available in bitmapped form.


Roman=Times                These settings enable ATM to use
Modern=Helvetica           PostScript outlines instead of the
                           standard Windows vector fonts.


Courier=Courier            This setting is needed if an 
                           application requests the smallest
                           available fixed-pitch font.  If this
                           line is not present, ATM provides 
                           someapplications with a 1-point 
                           Courier font.


Helv=Arial MT              If you have received ATM bundled with
Helvetica=Arial MT         another application, you might have 
Tms Rmn=TimesNewRomanPS    the fonts Arial MT and 
                           TimesNewRomanPS Times=TimesNewRomanPS 
                           instead the standard fonts Helvetica 
                           and Times. You should have these 
                           lines present in both the Aliases and 
                           Synonyms sections.  These settings 
                           tell ATM to use internal printer 
                           fonts when printing Arial MT and 
                           TimesNewRomanPS to a PostScript 
                           printer.  This reduces the time 
                           required to print documents and 
                           improves the quality of bold and 
                           italic text styles.

                           If you have all four faces 
                           (Helvetica, Times, Arial MT and 
                           TimesNewRomanPS), you should use the 
                           font pairs Helv=Helvetica and Tms 
                           Rmn=Times in these sections.


[Synonyms]


Helv=Helvetica             Unlike the font pairs in the Aliases
Tms Rmn=Times              section, the font pairs in the 
Courier=Courier            Synonyms are interchangeable.  This 
                           means thatwhen the font Helv is 
                           requested at apoint size not 
                           available in bitmapped form, the font 
                           Helvetica will be used.
                           
                           In Windows 3.0 & 3.0a, when the font
                           Helvetica is requested and a 
                           bitmapped Helv font of the exact size 
                           is available, ATM will use the Helv  
                           bitmap to display the font on the 
                           screen.  

                           In Windows 3.1, the screen fonts Helv
                           and Tms Rmn have been replaced by MS
                           Sans Serif and MS Serif, so screen
                           font deferral does not apply.


[Colors]	           This section may be added to the
                           ATM.INI to override internal ATM 
                           defaults.  The switch is global for
                           all applications.  While enabling 
                           this switch might be useful for a 
                           special purpose in a particular 
                           application, it can also produce 
                           unexpected results in other 
                           applications.

PrintColorGraphics=Off     This switch instructs ATM to print 
                           colored text as soft fonts under
                           Windows 3.1 rather than as dithered 
                           graphics.  The printer driver must
                           support soft font creation for this
                           switch to work.  For most printer
                           drivers, the resulting soft fonts 
                           print as black or white fonts.
009 LOTUS Free Lance Graphics For Windows 3×TD
README.TXT [展开]
Adobe Type Manager (R) version 2.02     Release Notes
Windows version
May 2, 1992

Adobe Type Manager is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.  Copyrights 1983-1992 Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All Rights Reserved.  Patents Pending



This document supplements the Adobe Type Manager User Guide.  
Topics include:

1.  Disk Contents
2.  Installation Requirements
3.  ATM.INI
4.  ATM Control Panel
5.  PostScript Soft Fonts Listed in ATM Control Panel
6.  Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts Option
7.  ATM and Printing
8.  Printer and Video Drivers
9.  Application Notes
    - Corel Draw
    - Designer 3.1 and Charisma 2.1
    - Harvard Draw 1.0
    - Harvard Graphics 1.0 for Windows
    - Micrografx PostScript Driver
    - Norton Desktop for Windows 1.0
    - PageMaker 4.0
    - PowerPoint 2.0
    - Ventura Publisher Windows Edition version 3.0
    - Various Applications with Draft Mode Printing Feature
    - Virus Protection Software
    - Word for Windows 1.1a, 2.0, and 2.0a
    - WordPerfect for Windows 5.1
10. Novell Netware Considerations
11. ATM and IBM 4029 Series Printers
12. Troubleshooting
A.  ATM.INI parameters



1. Disk Contents

The following files are found on your ATM disk(s):

ATM16.DLL             Program file for Windows Standard mode
ATM32.DLL             Program file for Windows 386 Enhanced mode
ATMSYS.DRV            ATM System driver
ATMCNTRL.EXE          ATM Control Panel
INSTALL.EXE           ATM Installer
INSTALL.CNF           ATM Installation configuration file
PROGDISK (FONTDISK)   Disk ID file
README.TXT            This file
ATM.CNF               Configuration file (might not be present
                      on upgrade disks)

Your disk(s) might also contain a PSFONTS directory and a 
PCLFONTS directory.  The PSFONTS directory contains PostScript 
Font Outline (PFB) files and Printer Font Metric (PFM) files.  
The PCLFONTS directory contains PCL bitmapped font files which 
have filename extensions of either SFP or SFL.  The PCLFONTS 
directory also contains Printer Font Metric (PFM) files.



2. Installation Requirements

To install ATM, you need a C:\ drive and sufficient disk space 
for the ATM software and fonts.  The amount of disk space you 
need depends on the number of fonts included with your ATM 
package.  The standard retail ATM package requires about 1 
megabyte of disk space.



3. ATM.INI

ATM's initialization file, ATM.INI, is created during
installation.  It contains a list of fonts installed in ATM and
other ATM program-related settings.  For more technical
information, see Appendix A at the end of this file.



4. ATM Control Panel

There is no longer a pre-defined limit to the number of fonts you 
can install with the ATM Control Panel.  Windows does, however, 
limit initialization files (including the ATM.INI and the 
WIN.INI) to a size of 64K.  If this limit is reached, Windows 
cannot open, read, or write properly to these INI files.

For Windows 3.0 and 3.0a, Microsoft recommends keeping 
initialization files smaller than 32k in size.  Following this 
recommendation, the maximum number of fonts that can be listed in 
ATM.INI for Windows 3.0 or 3.0a is around 450 fonts.  For Windows 
3.1, the only limit is the 64K maximum file size, which is large 
enough for about 900 fonts.


Fonts Listed in the ATM Control Panel

The more fonts you add with ATM, the longer it takes Windows 
to load.  The exact time depends on the type of processor
you have and your system configuration.  If you feel that Windows
is taking too long to load, you may want to free up more memory
available to Windows and/or reduce the total number of fonts
installed to a reasonable set of fonts you frequently use.



5. PostScript Soft Font Limits for Windows 3.0 and 3.0a

When you use the ATM Control Panel to add PostScript soft fonts, 
ATM places entries in your WIN.INI file that tell Windows to 
automatically download the fonts to your printer whenever you 
print a document containing the fonts.

For Windows 3.1, there is no longer a 150 font limit on the 
number of soft-font entries you can have for a PostScript 
printer.

For Windows 3.0 and 3.0a, however, the maximum number of soft-
font entries per PostScript printer WIN.INI entry is 
approximately 150.  The exact number depends on your particular 
system configuration.  This limit stems from the Windows 3.0 
PostScript driver's inability to enumerate a large number of 
fonts.  If you receive spurious printer-related error messages 
when starting Windows or switching to a PostScript printer, check 
the number of soft fonts you have installed in the PostScript 
printer section in the WIN.INI.  You might have to manually 
remove these soft-font entries to correct the printing problem.

If you remove soft-font entries from the PostScript printer 
section of the WIN.INI file, remember to adjust the line 
"softfonts=nn" to show the new total number of soft-font entries.  
For example, if your PostScript printer section lists 150 soft 
fonts and you remove 25, the line should read "softfonts=125".  
Also, the left side of the soft-font entries should number the 
remaining soft fonts continuously.  For 125 soft-fonts, the 
entries should begin with "softfont1=..." and continue without 
interruption through "softfont125=..."



6. Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts Option in the ATM Control
    Panel

When you select the Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts check box,
uses these fonts at print time instead of creating bitmapped 
fonts and sending them to your printer.  Although ATM does not 
require restarting Windows when changing the Use Pre-built or 
Resident Fonts option, it may be necessary to quit and restart 
applications for this option to take effect.

You may find that when this option is selected, resident fonts 
will not be masked by your printer if a graphic image is placed 
on top of the text.  As an example, open an application that 
allows you to draw images over text, select the font Courier, and 
draw a gray box on top of it.  The font will be covered by the 
gray box on the screen.  But with the Use Pre-built or Resident 
Fonts option selected, your printer will print the text on top of 
the gray box.  (This type of behavior also occurs when you turn 
ATM off.)  When you clear the Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts 
check box, your text and graphic images will print as displayed 
on-screen.



7. ATM and Printing

ATM uses PostScript outline fonts to produce a smooth graphic
display of your fonts on-screen.  The fonts available for use
depend on the printer you have selected in your application.

For non-PostScript printers, the fonts available are the internal 
printer fonts, the Windows internal bitmapped fonts, and the 
fonts listed in the ATM Control Panel.  At print time, ATM 
generates a graphic image of your text based on the PostScript 
outlines, and sends this image to your printer.  If you have PCL 
bitmapped fonts installed for your printer, the PCL driver will 
download these soft fonts if you have checked the Use Pre-built 
or Resident Fonts option in the ATM Control Panel.

For PostScript printers, the fonts available are the fonts 
resident in the printer and the PostScript soft-font entries 
listed in the printer's section in the WIN.INI file.  When you 
use the ATM Control Panel to add PostScript soft fonts, ATM adds 
soft-font entries in the WIN.INI file for the currently installed 
PostScript printers.  However, when you add a new PostScript 
printer (or change printer ports), you may find that some of the 
soft fonts listed in the ATM Control Panel do not appear in your 
application font menus.  This is because the PostScript soft-font 
entries in the WIN.INI file are missing for the new PostScript 
printer (or the printer attached to a new port).  To correct this 
problem, simply use the ATM Control Panel to add the missing 
fonts again.

When printing to a PostScript printer, ATM does not have to be 
active because it does not have to rasterize any fonts.  Windows 
and the PostScript driver download outline fonts to your 
PostScript printer.


Print Resolution

For the highest print quality, Adobe recommends you set your 
printer and printer driver to the highest print resolution.  
Certain PCL printer drivers do not properly set the print 
resolution.  They show 300 dpi resolution in the Windows Printer 
Control Panel even though they are set to a lower resolution.

Some applications fail to print correctly when your PCL printer 
resolution is not set to 300 dpi.    Excel 3.0a, for example, 
prints blank cells instead of ATM fonts if your PCL printer is 
not set to 300 dpi.

If you suspect your PCL printer driver is not set to 300 dpi, set 
the resolution to 75 dpi, save this option, and then set the 
resolution back to 300 dpi.  (When your printer resolution is set 
to 300 dpi, the line "prtresfac=0" appears in the PCL printer 
entry in the WIN.INI file.



8. Printer and Video Drivers

For the highest font rasterization quality, Adobe recommends you 
use the latest Windows printer and video drivers.



9. Application Notes


Corel Draw Version 2.0 and Earlier

These versions of Corel Draw do not work with ATM.


Designer 3.1 and Charisma 2.1

The lines used for underlines and strikeouts may appear broken
when using an ATM font.  This is due the way these Micrografx
products handle character placement.

If you rotate text at a 90 degree angle and then stretch it, you 
may find that the font will not be properly resized.  To avoid 
this problem, first resize the font and then rotate it.

Rotating stretched text at a 180 degree angle may cause the last 
letters in the text string to overlap.  In this case, first 
rotate the text by 180 degrees and then stretch it.

Rotated text at certain angles will sometimes print with expanded
character spacing on non-PostScript printers.  Try using the
Print View option and selecting the entire page.

Adobe is working with Micrografx to correct all these problems.


Harvard Draw 1.0

This version of Harvard Draw does not work with ATM.


Harvard Graphics 1.0 for Windows

Harvard Graphics cannot rotate ATM fonts.  Harvard Graphics uses 
internal fonts for rotated text.


Micrografx PostScript Driver

The Micrografx PostScript driver has a unique printer section
structure in the WIN.INI. PostScript soft fonts cannot be
installed to this driver using the ATM Installer and Control
Panel.  You can, however, install your fonts through the
Micrografx Printer Setup menu.  See your Micrografx manual
for instructions.


Norton Desktop for Windows 1.0

Due to the different structure of Norton Desktop's application
groups, the ATM icon will not be properly installed into the Main
group when running Norton as your desktop shell.  You must
manually add the ATM Control Panel icon.  The ATM Installer will,
however, copy all of the necessary files to your system and will
configure Windows to run ATM.


PageMaker 4.0

For best results with ATM, set the "Vector text above" and
"Stretch text above" limits in the Preferences dialog box to
10000 pixels each.


PowerPoint 2.0

For best results at small point sizes on screen, use the Windows 
Fonts Control Panel to remove the "Small Fonts" font.


Ventura Publisher Windows Edition v. 3.0

To use ATM with Ventura 3.0, you must install the "Windows" patch
disk.  You can receive this disk by contacting Ventura at (800)
822-8221.

The fonts Helvetica and Times will not display correctly in
Reduced View.

Reversed text does not print correctly to non-PostScript
printers.


Word for Windows 1.1a, 2.0, and 2.0a

Double underlines may print as one thick underline at point sizes
larger than 18 points.  This is due to the method Word for
Windows uses to perform double underlining.

In version 1.1a, the typeface used in the ruler and in the status
bar may not be Helvetica.  Word for Windows 1.1a uses the first 
variable pitch sans-serif font available in the [Fonts] section 
of the ATM.INI file.  To correct this problem, move Helvetica to 
the top of the [Fonts] section in your ATM.INI file.  Upgrading 
to Word for Windows version 2.0 and later also corrects this 
problem.


Various Applications with Draft Mode Printing Feature

Some applications which support draft mode printing do not print 
graphics when they print in draft mode.  Because ATM creates text 
as graphics, text might not print correctly in draft mode.


Virus Protection Software

Some virus protection software packages will not allow the ATM 
Installer to replace previous versions of ATM software.  If you 
have this problem, first scan your hard drive for viruses.  Then 
temporarily disable your virus protection software while you 
install ATM.  Remember to re-enable your virus protection 
software and re-scan your hard disk after installing ATM.


WordPerfect for Windows 5.1

Because WordPerfect does not use standard Windows font requests 
when using a WordPerfect printer driver, ATM does not work 
properly with WordPerfect printer drivers.  To use ATM with 
WordPerfect for Windows, use the standard Windows printer 
drivers.

WordPerfect for Windows does not allow Windows to display fonts
properly in preview mode.

Some special characters in the ANSI character set (with values 
higher than 128) do not print as displayed.  See your Windows 
documentation for the ANSI character set.



10. Novell Netware Considerations

Although ATM is not a network application, you can print to
network printers using ATM.  However, you have to configure the
File Contents section in your print job definition to specify 
byte stream instead of text.  (The byte stream option is required 
because ATM sends raster graphics to your non-PostScript 
printer.)

To add fonts from a network drive, you must first load a 
SHELL.CFG file containing the line "show dots = on".  Use IPX.COM 
to load the SHELL.CFG file.

There is also a 34-character limit for the PostScript target
directories for the PFB and PFM files.  If your target directory
name exceeds this limit, use the map root command (instead of the
usual map command) to map the directory to a simulated root
directory.



11. ATM and IBM 4029 Series Printers

To use ATM with one of the IBM 4029 series printers, you have to 
install version 3.01 or later of the 4029 printer driver and 
version 1.65 of the Generic printer driver.  These versions are 
available with Windows 3.1.  If you are using Windows 3.0, 
contact your printer dealer or manufacturer for the latest 
drivers.



12. Troubleshooting


Justified Text Exceeds Right Margin On Screen

Justified text sometimes extends beyond the right margin on
screen, but prints correctly.  This happens particularly at small
point sizes.  Two situations can cause this problem:

* Windows uses a screen font for a font of a different size.  
Turning off the Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts option in the ATM 
Control Panel corrects this problem.

* The problem is caused by roundoff errors occurring between ATM 
font metrics and how the particular application calculates the 
total width of a line of text.  This problem cannot be corrected.


Documents Containing the Arial MT and TimesNewRomanPS Fonts Print
 Slowly

If, after upgrading to Windows 3.1, you find that documents 
containing the fonts Arial MT and TimesNewRomanPS print more 
slowly on a PostScript printer, you can take the following steps 
to improve printing speed.

If you are using the Arial MT font, add the following line to 
both the [Aliases] section and [Synonyms] section of your ATM.INI 
file.

Helvetica=Arial MT

If you are using the TimesNewRomanPS font, add the following line 
to both the [Aliases] section and [Synonyms] section of your 
ATM.INI file.

Times=TimesNewRomanPS



Appendix A. ATM.INI Parameters

The following section contains technical information on ATM
version 2.02's initialization file.  This file is divided up into
six sections: Fonts, Setup, Settings, Mono, Aliases, and 
Synonyms.

[Fonts]   This section contains a list of all of the fonts
          installed with ATM and the locations of the
          PostScript PFM and PFB files for each font.  The fonts
          listed here are available to all non-PostScript
          printers for screen display and printing.  The fonts
          available to PostScript printers are based on the
          PostScript soft-font entries in the specific printer
          section of the WIN.INI file and those internal to the
          PostScript printer driver.  If a font is listed in both
          WIN.INI and ATM.INI, ATM will rasterize the font
          to the screen.  The printing of fonts to PostScript
          devices is solely the responsibility of the PostScript
          driver and Windows.  ATM does not have to be active
          when printing to PostScript devices.

          Another important point to remember about PostScript
          printers is that, although a particular application
          will allow you to bold or italicize a certain font,
          your PostScript printer will not be able to render the
          bold or italic font unless an outline for the bold or
          italic font is available.  On non-PostScript printers,
          however, ATM will synthesize a bold, italic or bold
          italic version of a font based on the roman outline if
          the outline of the desired font style is not present.

          When the ATM 2.02 Installer creates the [Fonts] section
          of the ATM.INI, it adds all the PostScript fonts found
          in the installation disk as well as any PostScript
          fonts  listed as soft-font entries for PostScript
          printers in the WIN.INI file.  If you are upgrading
          from a previous version of ATM, the Installer also adds
          all the fonts listed in the current ATM.INI file.

[Setup]

PFM_Dir   Default PFM directory for the ATM Control Panel when
          adding PostScript fonts.  

PFB_Dir   Default PFB directory for the ATM Control Panel when
          adding PostScript fonts.

[Settings]

FontCache=96      The size of the font cache is configurable
                  through the ATM Control Panel.  The default is
                  96.

ATM=On            Determines whether ATM will be loaded at 
                  Windows boot time.

BitmapFonts=On    This switch is set with the Use Pre-Built or
                  Resident Fonts check box on the ATM Control
                  Panel.  If you change this switch, you do not
                  have to restart Windows for the change to take
                  effect.  You may, however, have to restart
                  applications for the setting to take effect.
                  The default is On.  ATM will defer to screen
                  fonts, resident printer fonts, and printer soft
                  fonts rather than rasterizing the font itself 
                  if the font requested by the application is
                  available.

SynonymPSBegin=9  This value determines the point size at which
                  ATM will start using bitmap deferral for font
                  pairs listed in both the Aliases and Synonyms
                  sections.  The default is 9.  It is not
                  recommended that this setting be changed.

QLCDir            Indicates the path of the QuickLoad file
                  ATMFONTS.QLC, which contains a list of
                  installed fonts and font metrics, thus reducing
                  Windows boot time.  You can force ATM to
                  rebuild this file by deleting the file with the
                  MS-DOS DEL command and restarting Windows.

Version=2.02      This value enables the ATM Installer to
                  determine the version of ATM if ATM is not
                  active; otherwise, the Installer determines the
                  version of ATM from the DLL.

[Mono]
Courier=Yes       This section contains a list of monospaced
LetterGothic=Yes  fonts.
PrestigeElite=Yes
Orator=Yes

[Aliases]         This section tells ATM to substitute the font 
                  on the right of the equal sign for the font on 
                  the left of the equal sign when an application
                  requests the font on the left of the equal
                  sign.  The ATM Installer defines aliases for
                  the Helv, Tms Rmn, Courier, Roman, and Modern
                  bitmapped fonts.

                  When the Use Pre-built or Resident Fonts option
                  is turned on, ATM uses the resident bitmapped
                  fonts for point sizes for which bitmaps exist.
                  When The Use Pre-built or Resident option is
                  turned off, ATM uses the PostScript outline 
                  font to rasterize all sizes of the aliased 
                  bitmapped font.

Helv=Helvetica    The fonts left of the equals sign are Windows
Tms Rmn=Times     bitmapped fonts.  By using PostScript outline 
Courier=Courier   fonts, ATM can rasterize a smooth font when
                  these fonts are requested at sizes not 
                  available in bitmapped form.

Roman=Times       These settings enable ATM to use PostScript
Modern=Helvetica  outlines instead of the standard Windows vector
                  fonts (which are sometimes called "stick"
                  fonts).

Courier=Courier   This setting is needed if an application
                  requests the smallest available fixed-pitch
                  font.  If this line is not present, ATM
                  provides some applications with a 1-point
                  Courier font.

Helv=Arial MT            For Windows 3.0, these settings
Tms Rmn=TimesNewRomanPS  tell ATM to use internal printer fonts
                         when printing Arial MT and
                         TimesNewRomanPS to a PostScript printer.
                         This reduces the time required to print
                         documents and improves the quality of
                         bold and italic style text.

[Synonyms]

Helv=Helvetica    Unlike the font pairs in the Aliases section,
Tms Rmn=Times     the font pairs in the Synonyms are
Courier=Courier   interchangeable.  This means that when the font
                  Helv is requested at a point size not available
                  in bitmapped form, the font Helvetica will be
                  used.  However, when the font Helvetica is
                  requested and a bitmapped Helv font of the 
                  exact size is available, ATM will use the Helv 
                  bitmap to display the font on the screen; this
                  increases performance.
原始 1.IMG 2.IMG 3.IMG
010 Aldus INTELL-DRAW For Windows 8×HD
README.TXT [展开]
INTELLIDRAW WINDOWS NOTES
______________________________________________________

Welcome to IntelliDraw. Get ready for a new adventure 
to new horizons. Your drawings are no longer limited to 
being static and lifeless, and a chore to change. 
IntelliDraw opens a whole new world of possibilities.

HERE ARE SOME HELPFUL NOTES AND LATEST NEWS
______________________________________________________

WINDOW SIZING AND POSITIONING 

The size of your working window is initially dependent 
on the IntelliDraw Defaults document, which is the 
master for all your New documents. This document is 
installed in your IDRAW directory when you initially 
install IntelliDraw.

This installed default document has a 640 x 480 pixel 
format. To adjust this document to any size monitor, 
there is a simple, and permanent adjustment you can 
make:

- Choose New View from the View menu; then, when the 
  new small document window opens, close the original 
  window.
- Adjust the position of the new view window by 
  dragging the Name bar and resizing the window to 
  whatever working size you want. 

Also make any changes to page orientation, 
magnification, text setting choices, printer choices, and 
page setup. 

Finally, choose Save as Default from the File menu. All 
your future New documents will then use this window 
size, page orientation, text settings, etc.

You can change the settings of the default document at 
any time, and use the Save As Default command to 
establish the change.
______________________________________________________

POSITIONING PALETTES

IntelliDraw has several palettes that you can move, 
reshape, collapse, and hide completely. Their initial 
position is determined by the preferences document 
called IDRAW.PRF

After you launch IntelliDraw, arrange these palettes as 
you see fit. Every time you quit the program, 
IntelliDraw remembers which palettes were open and 
where you left them. These will reopen at those 
positions the next time you use the program.

Because IntelliDraw has both Short and Full menus, 
there are separate settings for the Short and Full 
versions of the Tool and Action Button palettes. This 
means that the placement of the Full Menus tool palette 
will not affect the location of the Short Menus tool 
palette. Each must be positioned in its own mode.

If you can't see a palette when the menu indicates it's 
open, check the following:

- Another palette may be on top of it
- It may be beyond the visible area of the monitor, 
  perhaps put there when you worked with a larger 
  monitor. To bring it back, do the following:
- Quit IntelliDraw
- Delete the IntelliDraw preferences document 
  IDRAW.PRF from the IDRAW directory.
- Launch IntelliDraw, which will open with no palettes. 

Use the View menu to open all the palettes you need, 
and place them where you want them. Be sure you set 
your palettes up in both Short and Full menus.
Finally:

- Quit IntelliDraw to establish the changes.
______________________________________________________

PERFORMANCE NOTES

IntelliDraw works best with real RAM. You can do a 
great deal of work, even with 4 MB machines. The more 
RAM you have, the better. 

If you run multiple applications, even if some are 
minimized, they will compete for real RAM.

When programs run low on real RAM, Windows uses a 
virtual memory scheme where the hard disk is used as 
RAM. (Virtual Memory is available only on 386 and 486 
computers.) This virtual RAM is much slower to access, 
and using it may significantly slow down operation. This 
slowdown depends on factors such as the amount of 
disk space used for virtual memory, and how often it's 
accessed.

The disk area used for virtual memory is called a Swap 
File. If your system configuration uses a small Swap File 
and IntelliDraw is forced to access the disk a great deal, 
it will seem sluggish. It may take a long time even to 
launch. When IntelliDraw has to access the Swap File, its 
performance is slowed; its performance then is directly 
related to the speed of your hard disk. 

Here's how you check and change the size of your Swap 
file for Windows 3.1:

- In the Program Manager, open the Main program 
  group window
- Double-click the Control Panel icon
- Double-click the 386 Enhanced icon
- Click the Virtual Memory Button. This will display an 
  information window.
- Click the Change button.

In the window that opens, you'll see in the New Size 
box a proposed value. If this is 4MB or more, and 
performance has been satisfactory, don't change it. If 
performance has been sluggish, and you've noted 
frequent disk access, increase the size by 50%. Finally:

- Click OK or Cancel, depending on your findings and 
  actions, and continue OK'ing or cancelling out of the 
  dialogs.
- Restart Windows to activate the new settings.

To change the swap file size under Windows 3.0, 
consult your Windows manual.
______________________________________________________

THE COMPUTER BEEPS WHEN YOU'VE DONE NOTHING WRONG, OR
SMART LINKED GRAPHICS ARE LEFT IN A DISJOINTED STATE

Both these conditions are related to the speed of your 
CPU, and to the complexity of the special relationships 
in the graphic. 

After you make a change to a graphic that has 
relationships such as objects attached to a shape, many 
objects inside a distribution frame, etcetera, IntelliDraw 
spends a certain amount of time figuring out where 
everything should be redrawn. The more objects are 
involved and the more complex the relationships, the 
more time this "link resolution" requires. Normally, it all 
works, and finishes in short order.

To keep IntelliDraw from spending a long time, possibly 
trying to resolve an impossible set of relationships, there 
is a time limit that you can set in the Preferences.

If IntelliDraw can't resolve the links in that specified 
time, it will beep, and possibly leave the drawing in an 
incompletely resolved state.  On faster computers 
IntelliDraw completes its work well within the default 
time in the preferences. On slower computers you may 
need to allow more time.

To change the link resolution time, use the Preferences 
command (in the Full Menus mode) and double the 
"After dragging" value in the Link Resolution section of 
the Preferences dialog. Close the dialog and make a 
change to your graphic so that IntelliDraw re-resolves it.

If this time change doesn't correct you particular 
problem, you may have established a set of relationships 
that are mutually exclusive, and could never be 
completely resolved.  In that case, examine or undo your 
most recent actions, which may have caused this 
condition. If all else fails, select the objects involved and 
choose Clear Links from the Links menu, and start 
fresh.
______________________________________________________

HOW VIDEO CARDS AND MODES AFFECT PERFORMANCE

If you have a Super VGA display, and are using high 
resolution, IntelliDraw will need to use a great deal of 
memory for its off-screen buffer, which is a method of 
enabling smooth, flicker-free drawing. This will tax your 
RAM, but if you have sufficient real RAM, it should not 
degrade performance.

To improve performance without turning off the off-
screen buffer, reduce the number of displayable colors, 
or reduce the resolution.

To free up the RAM (real or virtual) otherwise required 
by IntelliDraw for its off-screen buffer, you can try 
turning off that mode. Use the View Settings command 
to do this, and un-check the 'Use off-screen buffer' 
option.

For 16-bit and 24-bit video cards, IntelliDraw 
automatically turns off the off-screen buffer. You can 
turn it on if you want by using the View Settings 
command to check-mark the 'Use off-screen buffer' 
option.
______________________________________________________

PERFORMANCE ON PORTABLES

Some portables save battery power by slowing down the 
CPU clock. IntelliDraw's smart features are directly 
affected by this slower clock speed. Consult you 
portable's manual on this subject, and choose the 
options to run at full clock speed.
______________________________________________________

SHORT MENUS AND FULL MENUS

IntelliDraw will initially open in Short Menus. Some 
tools and capabilities mentioned in the manuals and 
video tape are found only in the Full Menus mode.

Full Menus mode allows you to access the Preferences 
settings, as well as the Layers palette and special tools.

To switch to the Full Menus mode, choose Full Menus 
from the Edit menu. 

A few menu items relocate to different menus,  
depending on which mode is active. However, the menu 
grouping is still logical.

The reference manual refers to all tools and menu items 
in Full Menus mode.
______________________________________________________

MICROGRAFX WINDOWS DRAW IMPORT

IntelliDraw does not currently ship with an import filter 
that will directly import native Micrografx Designer or 
Windows Draw Images in .DRW format. 

The capability is available through these various options:

- Export as .PIC or .EPS from Micrografx Designer or 
  Windows Draw 

OR

- IntelliDraw uses the filters residing in the ALDUS 
  directory. If you own Aldus PageMaker or Aldus 
  Persuasion, you already own the import filter needed to 
  import .DRW into IntelliDraw.

OR

- If you own a Micrografx product that has import filters 
  for PageMaker or Persuasion, you can install the filters 
  into the Aldus folder that IntelliDraw creates.
______________________________________________________

GENERAL MAC/WINDOWS FILE SHARING NOTES

IntelliDraw documents created on Macintosh or 
Windows platforms are completely shareable between 
these platforms, across a network, or via properly 
formatted disks. However, the two operating systems 
have different file naming and file-typing requirements, 
and don't instantly recognize each other's files.


SHARING FILES: WINDOWS TO MACINTOSH

Because of the different file-typing methods, a 
document created in Windows IntelliDraw transferred to 
the Macintosh can't be double-clicked to open it. You 
must first launch IntelliDraw, then open the document 
via the Open dialog. Be sure that the Show All option is 
checked in the Open dialog. Once you Save As... on the 
Macintosh, that same file will be double-clickable.


SHARING FILES: MACINTOSH TO WINDOWS

Macintosh files typically have names that are longer than 
8 characters. Windows requires names of 8 characters 
or less, followed by a 3-character extension. In the case 
of IntelliDraw, this extension is IDW for working 
documents, and IDT for template files.

You can have Macintosh files recognized by Windows 
IntelliDraw by naming them with a name of 8 characters 
or less, and adding the proper extension. If you don't 
use an extension, you can still make IntelliDraw 
Windows recognize the file in the Open dialog by 
choosing "All files" from the drop-down list.
______________________________________________________

THE BEST WAY TO OLE

The best way to link your IntelliDraw object with OLE 
is to first create a group or a symbol, and then copy and 
Paste Link the group to the other application. This will 
enable you to add or remove items from the IntelliDraw 
group, maintaining the existing OLE link. You'll save 
the trouble of re-establishing the link when you have to 
make a change.
______________________________________________________

TEXT, ATM AND TRUETYPE

For Windows 3.0 systems, you will need to install 
Adobe Type Manager (ATM), and a set of Adobe Type 
1 outline fonts in order to properly display type that is 
rotated or otherwise manipulated in IntelliDraw.

If you've installed ATM, and your text still comes out 
jagged or even as gray boxes, you may not have 
properly installed the outline fonts into your System, or 
they may have been deleted some time after installation. 
Consult your ATM installation guide.

We recommend that you install ATM even if you have 
Windows 3.1, for several reasons:

- You'll have a wider selection of fonts
- General character positioning will be more consistent 
  between Windows and Macintosh platforms.
______________________________________________________

TEXT APPEARANCE CHANGES WHEN DOCUMENTS ARE TRANSFERRED
BETWEEN MAC AND WINDOWS

One major factor is that Windows TrueType fonts don't 
have close equivalents to Macintosh TrueType fonts. 
This affects the size and spacing of text transferred from 
one platform to another.

Even with ATM used on both platforms, there may be 
differences introduced.

A text block in a cross-platform document may need to 
be size-adjusted to hold the same text that it held in the 
platform on which it was created.

For example, the Windows TrueType font Arial will be 
interpreted as the TrueType font Geneva on the 
Macintosh. These fonts have different basic dimensions, 
and text blocks that contain these fonts will need 
adjustment.  

Depending on whether your system utilizes ATM or 
TrueType, and on the fonts installed, the IntelliDraw 
clip art, which has embedded text instructions on its use, 
may open with its text in an odd state, perhaps flowing 
out of the text blocks in which it was created. 

Adjustments you can make include resizing the blocks; 
selecting the text blocks and choosing a different font; 
or changing the font size or line spacing. Other 
adjustments to fit the text back inside the blocks, include 
resizing a text block slightly, or typing a space in a text 
block, then deleting it.
______________________________________________________

GREEKING TEXT

When text needs to be displayed as extremely small 
characters, as in highly reduced views or extremely 
small point sizes (below 3 points), it is displayed as gray 
bars, each bar representing a line of text. This is not a 
problem with fonts. It's an intentional process commonly 
called "Greeking," and found in desktop publishing 
programs as well. It's only a screen-display shortcut, 
your text will print fine. Zooming in will reveal that your 
text is safe.
______________________________________________________

TRUETYPE AND HEWLETT-PACKARD PCL PRINTERS 

There is an option on Hewlett-Packard PCL printers 
with HPPCL5A drivers that allows you to print 
TrueType fonts as graphics. This option MUST be 
enabled for IntelliDraw to print  text correctly on these 
printers. IntelliDraw will print the text without this 
option, but the text may cover some graphic objects.
______________________________________________________

THE COLOR OF OBJECTS EXPORTED AS EPS

Color-filled shapes exported as EPS imports back in as 
black & white in other programs. This is only a screen-
display condition. This is intentionally done in order to 
remain compatible with some other applications which 
do not display imported EPS color to the screen. The 
graphic will print in full color or grays.
______________________________________________________

EXPORTING TILED GROUPS AND CROPPED GROUPS

Exporting IntelliDraw graphics that contain tiled groups 
and cropped groups as Windows metafiles will lose vital 
cropping information. The metafile format does not 
support objects that are cropped inside a shape, so the 
resulting Windows metafile image will look like the 
shape contents have been unmasked. 

EPS is the format of choice for this type of graphic. 
Even though the screen appearance of EPS files may not 
match the original document, it will print fine.
______________________________________________________

EXPORTING OR COPYING GRADIENT-FILLED SHAPES TO 
OTHER APPLICATIONS

If you want to print IntelliDraw gradients from another 
application to a PostScript printer, you must export 
your drawing as an EPS file. If you use the Windows 
clipboard or export to a Windows metafile, your 
gradients display correctly, but will print as large 
rectangles.

If you copy gradients to the clipboard and paste them 
into other drawing programs, they will be disassembled 
by the drawing program, and appear as many separate 
objects; they will not be contained within your original 
filled shape.

EPS is the format of choice for this type of graphic. 
Even though the screen appearance of EPS files may not 
match the original document, it will print fine.
______________________________________________________

BREAKING APART TILED GROUPS

IntelliDraw lets you tile any object or group of selected 
objects. After creating an expanse of tiled objects, you 
can break it apart into individual objects so you can edit 
them as if you had drawn them separately. 

After the Break Apart operation, for easier management 
of complex tiles, IntelliDraw automatically groups the 
individual tiles. This may not be obvious, because even 
if the tiles are plain rectangles, they will be one-item 
groups.

Immediately after the Break Apart operation, you can 
ungroup all the tiles (which will already be selected). 
This will make them fully editable as individual objects.
______________________________________________________

CLOSING AND CLOSING ALL

If you have multiple windows of the same document 
open, the document is not considered closed until you 
close ALL the windows pertaining to it. This includes 
the symbol window, any group windows, page 
windows, and any multiple views onto the same page. 
You can close all those windows at once by holding the 
shift key down BEFORE choosing Close in the File 
menu. The shift key changes the Close command to a 
Close All command.
______________________________________________________

ROTATION BY NUMERIC VALUE IS THE REVERSE OF 
DOCUMENTED BEHAVIOR

When an object is rotated via the dialog box, entering a 
POSITIVE value rotates the object COUNTERCLOCKWISE, 
entering a NEGATIVE value rotates the object CLOCKWISE. 
The documentation calls for clockwise rotation with 
positive values. The Rotate Tool is discussed on 
pgs. 83-84 of the Reference Manual.
______________________________________________________

THE RESHAPE POINTS OF LOCKED OBJECTS CAN BE SHIFTED
BY A LINKED OBJECT

To use auto-align against the reshape points of an 
object, you must put it in reshape mode by double-
clicking. If you then align and link an object to a reshape 
point of a locked object, then move the linked object, 
the point of the locked object point will move, as if it 
were unlocked. The following steps will allow you to 
work around the problem:

- Create a point with the point tool (Full Menus)
- Align the new point with the point on the  reshapeable 
  object
- With the point objects selected, choose Move to Back 
  from the Object menu
- Lock that point object. 

You can then align other objects and dimension lines 
against that locked point, and nothing will unexpectedly 
shift. (The properties of a locked object in Reshape 
mode are misstated on page 139).

You may run across this condition in the Space Planning 
exercise in the manual. One possible place is when you 
first set the space between the hallway walls, and when 
you set the space of the prototype lab doorway. Use 
manual dragging at 200% magnification to set these 
distances.
______________________________________________________

KANJI SUPPORT

IntelliDraw does not currently support the Kanji 
alphabet.
______________________________________________________

AVOID OVER-LINKING

IntelliDraw gives the day-to-day user the ability to link 
graphics in all kinds of relationships. You may have the 
natural tendency to link everything to everything else, 
and produce an amazingly tangled web. Our advice is to 
only link what you need to.

Consider linking as the fasteners in a tool-kit. You only 
use them when it makes sense. You would not, for 
instance, glue your cup to your desk, or bolt your car to 
the floor of the garage.

Remember that IntelliDraw offers other object 
management controls like grouping and locking, which 
are familiar and easily manageable.

In other words, use linking sparingly to better control 
your documents.

Because most links are not obvious unless you change 
something and watch the results, it's perfectly possible 
to establish multiple identical links between the same 
objects. These are redundant, and while they don't hurt 
anything, they can add processing overhead to otherwise 
simpler actions. You can use Show Links to examine the 
"wiring" in your drawing, and check  for multiple 
identical links. 

Early in your linking experience, it's best, and least time-
consuming, to clear a link and re-establish it correctly. 
As you us it more, you'll become link-savvy, and you'll 
fly through your linked relationships, recognizing them 
on sight and making swift changes.
______________________________________________________

AND FINALLY...

Thank you for purchasing IntelliDraw. We hope that the 
ideas we put into it will help bring your own ideas to 
life.

The Team
011 Aldus PERSUASON V2.10 8×HD
README.TXT [展开]
⌐ Copyright Aldus Corporation 1992. All rights reserved.


		    ALDUS PERSUASION 2.1 FOR WINDOWS
	       A GUIDE TO THE PERSUASION ONLINE TEXT FILES

This file contains two sections:

o A guide to online text files that document 
Persuasion
o Late-breaking news about Persuasion that's not in the 
printed documentation


GUIDE TO ONLINE FILES

The PR2UK\TUTORIAL directory contains several files for use 
with the lessons in Aldus Persuasion Getting Started.

The PR2UK\PRES directory contains the presentation file 
PREVIEW.PR2. PREVIEW.PR2 is a sample 
presentation. You can load the file, run it as a slide show, 
and look at all the views to see how a typical Persuasion 
presentation can be put together.

The PR2UK directory contains the following text-only (.TXT) 
files.  You can use any text editor or word-processing 
program to display or print them.  Other disks included in 
the Persuasion package may also contain .TXT files.

35MMDVRS.TXT -- Information about drivers for use with film 
recorders and slide service bureaus

AUTOTEMP.TXT -- Tips on creating and using Persuasion 
AutoTemplates

COLORTBL.TXT -- Colour formulas for all colours in the 
standard colour grid in the colours palette

FONTS.TXT -- Details about working with fonts and type 
managers; printing to PCL and PostScript printers

INI.TXT -- Details about the Persuasion settings stored in 
the ALDUS.INI and WIN.INI files

PRNTDVRS.TXT -- Information about new printer drivers 
included with Persuasion


LATE-BREAKING PERSUASION NEWS

This section discusses the following topics:

o  Disk space considerations
o  Font translation
o  A change to the documentation
o  Layering slides
o  Working with charts, tables, and data sheets
o  Working with slide masters
o  Working with graphics
o  Importing and exporting files
o  Saving or exporting in a networked environment
o  Printing
o  Running a slide show
o  Sharing data with other applications


Disk space considerations 
 
Persuasion requires approximately 15K of free space on the disk 
on which a file is saved in order to make changes to the file. 
To make sure that this space is available, it is a good idea to 
work on files that have been saved to a hard disk, rather than 
to a floppy disk.  If the disk is filled during a work session, 
your most recent changes may be lost.  Should this happen, switch 
to the Windows File Manager and remove some files from the disk 
or exit Persuasion and copy the file to a disk with more room.  
Then restart Persuasion and reopen the file.


Font translation

Aldus Setup adds a font translation section to your 
ALDUS.INI file.  Refer to this section to find out how 
your fonts will translate when you transfer a presentation 
file from the Windows environment to the Macintosh. You
can add entries to the font translation table to include fonts
you may have that are not already listed. You may also delete
entries if you wish to prevent font translation during
file transfer between the two environments.


A change to the documentation

The "Slide setup" and "Notes setup" dialog boxes differ from 
their representation in the printed documentation. The options
for standard sizes have been replaced with a drop-down list 
box labeled "Slide" or "Page." To specify a non-standard
--or custom--size, select "custom" for "Slide" or "Page," 
and then enter the dimensions you want in the text boxes 
for "Slide dimensions" or "Page dimensions."


Layering slides

The drawing layer must always be an active layer. If you 
forget to include the drawing layer when you specify active 
layers (in the "Set layers" dialog box), Persuasion will 
automatically change the dialog box to add the drawing layer 
to the active layers you've specified.

When assigning automatic layering (choose the "Build layers..." 
command from the Master menu) to a pie chart, select the 
"Series" option, rather than "Categories."


Working with charts, tables, and data sheets

Even though the maximum dimensions of the data sheet are 256 
by 256, you can enter 8192 values.

When selecting a chart that has a transparent background 
with the pointer or chart tool, click on a visible chart 
element. Also, the upper-left corner of the chart tool icon 
is the "hot spot" for selection.

You cannot import a chart that is part of an Excel 3.0 .XLS 
file; only charts created as .XLC files can be imported.

When copying placeholder charts from one slide to another,
the new chart on the target slide is a static chart and will 
show a custom format of "None" in the "Chart info" dialog box.
This preserves any format changes you may have added to the chart. 
To copy placeholder charts from one slide to another, use the 
outline.


Working with slide masters

When you copy slide masters from an AutoTemplate that 
uses a different page size or orientation, Persuasion displays 
a warning message: "Page size or orientation of imported 
masters does not match target presentation.  Text and 
graphics could require significant adjustment. Continue?"  
If you click "OK," the masters will be copied, but you will 
need to check each slide in the presentation and make 
adjustments as necessary.

To ensure that the AutoTemplate is not dependent upon 
an externally-linked image file, select the image from the 
source application, and then copy and paste it onto your 
master. Thus, the AutoTemplate will be easier to move from 
one work environment to another.


Working with graphics

TIFF images displayed on an 8514 display device which has 
minimum memory (256K) may cause Persuasion to exit 
unexpectedly. If you must display TIFF images, add more 
memory to the 8514 display card.

There is a known problem with 24-bit colour images imported 
into Persuasion on monitors using 32K colour cards when 
drawing the slide off screen.  Off-screen drawing occurs 
during a slide show, exporting to a Persuasion Player file, 
or scrolling in Slide sorter view. Note that there are no 
problems printing the image or viewing the image on 
the slide. However, we recommended that you set your 
monitor to 256 colour mode if you work with 24-bit images 
on 32K colour cards.


Importing and exporting files

When exporting text files that have "soft returns" (Shift + 
Enter), Persuasion converts the soft returns into spaces.

The PageMaker Time/Date-Stamp import filter does not work 
with Persuasion. Use the special character codes for time and 
date provided in the Aldus Persuasion User Manual.

Word for Windows files (.DOC) containing tables or in-line 
graphics do not import into Persuasion correctly. 

To copy and paste .TIFF files from PageMaker to Persuasion, 
both PageMaker and Persuasion must have a high resolution 
option set. In PageMaker, choose "Preferences..." from the 
Edit menu and select "High resolution." For Persuasion, set 
"HiResTiff = 1" in ALDUS.INI, and then restart Persuasion.

If portions of an imported graphic disappear when you 
ungroup it, the ungrouped elements have exceeded the 
available memory. Delete the graphic and import it again.

For imported EPS files, you must have the appropriate fonts 
available on your computer before you attempt to print your 
slides. You must also download the font to the printer by 
adding a space character from that font to the slide that 
contains the imported EPS file. Otherwise, the EPS file will 
not print.

There are at least two limits on the size of Pict Persuasion
can import. If the Pict contains bitmaps, no bitmap can be
bigger than 1 megabyte when you are running Windows
in Standard mode or 64 megabytes in 386 Enhanced mode.
Note that a Pict file can be smaller than the bitmap it
contains due to compression.  If you get an "insufficient
memory" or similar error when you try to import a Pict
containing a bitmap while running in Standard mode,
try running in 386 Enhanced mode.

The other limit has to do with the complexity of the Pict
image. There is a hard limit on the number of figures an
image can contain. That means that some Picts will not
import successfully. If you get an "insufficient memory"
or similar error when importing a Pict, try simplifying 
the image in the host application and importing it again.

Exported slides containing graduated-fill backgrounds may 
appear banded when imported to other applications. The 
Windows Metafile format (.WMF) used for exporting slides 
does not provide a method for accurately representing 
graduated fills. As a result, Persuasion exports a close 
approximation of the graduated fill that is a series of 
small rectangles, each with a slightly different colour.

To move a slide from one presentation to another, use the 
"Cut" or "Copy" and "Paste" commands. If you use "Export" 
and "Place...," the slide will be imported in Windows 
Metafile format which, if ungrouped, will cause any text to 
be converted to a very small point size. (This problem can 
also be solved by selecting the text and adjusting its 
point size.)

You can receive the message "Filter currently in use by 
another application" under the following conditions: you 
have clicked "Cancel" in the "Place" dialog box, chosen 
"Place...," and then selected the same file type as before. 
To solve this problem, close Persuasion and re-open it.


Saving or exporting in a networked environment

When saving a presentation as an interchange file, or when 
exporting a slide show, save or export the file directly to 
your hard disk. Saving or exporting a file to a networked 
server is not recommended because data may be lost. Transfer
interchange files and slide show files to a server after you 
save them to your hard drive.


Printing

Twenty-four-bit colour TIFF images may print unpredictably
when using the Hewlett-Packard Paintjet Series 1.0 printer 
driver. If the printing fails, try again. Printing a second 
time may be successful. Alternatively, try the HP Paintjet 
Series printer driver that came with Microsoft Windows.

If a pie chart contains a wedge with an angle greater than 
180 degrees, it can print with missing lines in the depth 
portion of the chart on a HP Laserjet printer under the 
following conditions: you are printing at a resolution of 
300 dpi, and you have chosen the option "Proof print."

Objects pasted into a presentation from Adobe Typealign, 
which have then been stretched or moved, may not be printed 
in the correct locations on PostScript printers. To correct 
this problem, edit the "CustomPlayMetafile" entry in 
ALDUS.INI to be equal to "0." If you have similar 
difficulties with other applications, remove this entry from 
ALDUS.INI.


Running a slide show

When you want to run a slide show in Persuasion on a 
different PC than the one on which it was created, be sure
that the target machine has the fonts you used in your pre-
sentation. Otherwise, you may encounter font substitutions
that alter the look of your slides.  (Font substitution is 
not a problem with Persuasion Player files, since the Player 
displays only a bitmapped representation of the fonts.)


Sharing data with other applications

Make sure to save an Excel file before you copy it to the
clipboard for "Paste-link" into Persuasion.

Problems have been encountered while changing links
to Excel files while Excel is running.  We recommend that
you save and close the Excel application before changing 
links. Using "Copy linked files" in the "Save as..." dialog
box results in the same problem when Excel is running
with an open file that is linked. Therefore, we recommend
that you close Excel before saving a presentation that
contains links to Excel files.

There are also some problems involved with changing OLE links 
to open files and to files stored on networked drives. We do
not recommend changing links on files that are saved on net-
worked drives.  If the network file is open, we recommend you
choose "Save as..." in Excel to save the file to your local disk
before you change links in Persuasion.
012 Aldus Free Hand V3.10 9×HD
README.TXT [展开]
Aldus Corporation
Aldus FreeHand 3.1
March 13, 1992

README.TXT

This file contains information that became 
available after the documentation for 
Aldus FreeHand version 3.0 for use with 
Microsoft Windows was printed. You may 
wish to print this file and keep it with 
your "Aldus FreeHand User Manual." To read 
this document online, you can use the 
Notepad "Search..." command to look up 
particular topics.

README.TXT contains information about:
1. INSTALLING UNDER AN ALTERNATIVE SHELL
2. RECOMMENDED MEMORY (RAM)
3. ONLINE TUTORIAL
4. CORRECTIONS TO THE PRINTED 
	DOCUMENTATION
	*INFORMATION BAR DISPLAY
	*WRAPPING A TEXT BLOCK
	*PC PAINT (PIC) FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED
	*TABLE EDITOR (TBL) FORMAT NOT 
		SUPPORTED
	*VIDEOSHOW NAPLPS (PIC) FORMAT NOT 
		SUPPORTED
	*EXPORTING A TIFF IMAGE
	*REMOVING A POINT FROM A PATH
	*NO "UNKNOWN" FORMAT IN "PLACE 
		DOCUMENT" DIALOG BOX 
5. NUMBER OF OPEN ILLUSTRATIONS ALLOWED
6. ADOBE TYPE MANAGER COMPATIBILITY
7. COPYING A BITMAPPED IMAGE TO WINDOWS 
	PAINTBRUSH
8. COPYING TILED FILLS BETWEEN PROGRAMS
9. OPENING A COMPLEX ILLUSTRATION
10. TRANSFERRING A FILE TO ALDUS 
	FREEHAND 3.0 FOR MACINTOSH
11. PUBLISH AND SUBSCRIBE
12. CMYK TIFF FORMAT SUPPORTED
13. IMPORTING A WINDOWS METAFILE (WMF)
14. IMPORTING AND EXPORTING ENCAPSULATED 
	POSTSCRIPT (EPS) FILES THAT CONTAIN
	TEXT
15. DESKTOP COLOUR SEPARATIONS (DCS) FORMAT 
	SUPPORTED
16. MICROGRAFX DRAW (DRW) IMPORT
17. LOTUS FREELANCE GRAPHICS (DRW) 
	FORMAT IMPORT
18. IMPORTING A WMF FILE FROM COREL DRAW
19. HPGL (HEWLETT-PACKARD GRAPHICS 
	LANGUAGE) FILTER
20. CREATING A COLOUR BITMAP
21. VIDEO CARDS AND ALDUS FREEHAND 
	VIDEO BUFFERS
22. TIFF IMAGE DISPLAY AND MEMORY
23. SPEEDING PRINTING ON A PCL PRINTER
24. CALIBRATING AN IMAGESETTER USING 
	A PDX FILE
25. PRINTING ILLUSTRATIONS 
	CONTAINING CLIPPING PATHS
26. OLD CALCOMP DRIVERS MAY CAUSE CRASH
27. "NOT AN ATM FONT" WARNING MESSAGE AT EXPORT
28. PRINTING TRUETYPE FONTS
29. PPD/PDX FILENAMES

=====================================
1. INSTALLING UNDER AN ALTERNATIVE SHELL
=====================================
If you install Aldus FreeHand while 
running a shell other than Program Manager 
(such as Norton Desktop), you may need to 
create an Aldus group and program icons 
for Aldus FreeHand, the online tutorial 
("Learning Aldus FreeHand"), and the Aldus 
Setup program. Refer to your shell program 
documentation for instructions on creating 
groups and program icons. The files you 
use to create the program icons and their 
locations (if you install using the 
default installation options) are:
\FH3IE\FH3.EXE				Aldus FreeHand
\FH3IE\FH3LIB\FHSTUTIN.TBK		online tutorial
\ALDUS\UKENGLSH\SETUP\ALDSETUP.EXE 	Aldus Setup

=====================================
2. RECOMMENDED MEMORY (RAM)
=====================================
The minimum configuration for running 
Aldus FreeHand is an 80286-based computer 
with 2 MB of RAM (random access memory). 
However, Windows and Aldus FreeHand will 
run better if your computer has more 
memory. If your computer has 2 MB of RAM, 
try to maximise the amount of free memory 
in Windows using the suggestions in "Out-
of-memory problems" in Appendix A of the 
"Aldus FreeHand User Manual." In addition, 
consider installing more RAM in your 
computer. 

=====================================
3. ONLINE TUTORIAL
=====================================
To run both the Aldus FreeHand online 
tutorial and Aldus FreeHand 
simultaneously, Windows must have at least 
1600K of free memory. To check the amount 
of free memory, choose "About Program 
Manager..." from the Program Manager Help 
menu. If Windows has less than 1600K of 
free memory, you can free additional 
memory by closing other programs (if any 
are running). Otherwise, you may not be 
able to launch Aldus FreeHand by clicking 
the "Practice" button in the tutorial 
window.

If you are using a 24-bit colour monitor at 
a resolution greater than 800 by 600, you 
may notice that the tutorial runs slowly. 
If you encounter this problem, you may be 
able to speed up the tutorial by 
configuring Windows (using Windows Setup) 
to run using a lower resolution or display 
fewer colours (256 or fewer). (You may need 
to install a different screen driver: 
refer to your monitor and video card 
manufacturer's instructions for more 
information.)

Similarly, if you are using a 24-bit colour 
monitor at a resolution greater than 800 
by 600, the screen may appear to go blank 
when you launch the tutorial. If you 
encounter this problem, press Alt + F4 to 
close the tutorial. Then, close other 
Windows programs to free memory. If the 
screen is still blank when you restart the 
tutorial, you need to configure Windows to 
run at a lower resolution or display fewer 
colours.

=====================================
4. CORRECTIONS TO THE PRINTED 
DOCUMENTATION
=====================================
INFORMATION BAR DISPLAY
Pages 398-399 of the "Aldus FreeHand User 
Manual" incorrectly state that Aldus 
FreeHand displays a delta symbol 
(triangle) in the information bar to 
indicate the amount of change in a value. 
Instead, the word "delta" appears when the 
change is in letter space, word space, or 
leading (for example, "delta word space"); 
and the letter "d" appears when the change 
is in horizontal or vertical distance 
(indicated by "dh" or "dv").

WRAPPING A TEXT BLOCK
Pages 111-115 of the "Aldus FreeHand User 
Manual" incorrectly state that clicking on 
the illustration page with the text tool 
starts an unwrapped text block. Instead, 
either clicking or dragging on the 
illustration page starts a wrapped text 
block. To create an unwrapped text block, 
first create a wrapped text block. Then, 
double-click the text block using the 
pointer tool, and uncheck the "Autowrap" 
check box in the "Text" window. (Centre-
aligned text is always unwrapped.)

PC PAINT (PIC) FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED
Chapter 28 of the "Aldus FreeHand User 
Manual" incorrectly states that Aldus 
FreeHand imports PC Paint (PIC) files. 
Aldus FreeHand does not import files in 
this format.

TABLE EDITOR (TBL) FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED
Chapter 28 of the "Aldus FreeHand User 
Manual" incorrectly states that Aldus 
FreeHand imports Table Editor (TBL) files. 
Aldus FreeHand does not import files in 
this format but does import Table Editor 
files exported in Windows metafile (.WMF) 
format. (Choose "Export..." from the Table 
Editor File menu.) 

VIDEOSHOW NAPLPS (PIC) FORMAT NOT 
SUPPORTED
Chapter 28 of the "Aldus FreeHand User 
Manual" incorrectly states that Aldus 
FreeHand imports VideoShow NAPLPS (PIC) 
files. Aldus FreeHand does not import 
files in this format.

EXPORTING A TIFF IMAGE
Page 325 of the "Aldus FreeHand User 
Manual" incorrectly states that Aldus 
FreeHand exports 1-bit (black-and-white) 
TIFF images (when you select "TIFF image" 
from the "Format" drop-down list box in 
the "Export" dialog box) only at a 
resolution of 72 dots per inch (dpi). 
Instead, Aldus FreeHand exports TIFF 
images at the resolution specified for the 
"Target printer resolution" option in the 
"Document setup" dialog box. (Choose 
"Document setup..." from the File menu.) 
You can select a resolution from the 
"Target printer resolution" drop-down list 
box or type any resolution between 72 and 
600 dpi. (Because patterned fills are 
designed to be printed at 72 dpi, if you 
export an illustration containing 
patterned fills at a resolution higher 
than 72 dpi, the fill patterns will become 
smaller. If you encounter this problem, 
try creating tiled fills instead.) 

IMPORTANT: Be sure to change the "Target 
printer resolution" setting back to the 
resolution of the target printer after you 
export your illustration, so Aldus 
FreeHand will use the optimised screen 
rules and angles for your target printer 
when you print the illustration.

REMOVING A POINT FROM A PATH
Page 92 of the Aldus FreeHand User Manual 
incorrectly states that you can use the 
Delete key to delete a selected point on a 
path. Pressing Delete removes the entire 
path from your illustration. (You can 
restore the path by immediately choosing 
"Undo" from the Edit menu.)

NO "UNKNOWN" FORMAT OPTION IN "PLACE 
DOCUMENT" DIALOG BOX
Page 296 of the "Aldus FreeHand User Manual" 
incorrectly states that you can select
"Unknown" from the "Format" drop-down list 
box to display all the files in the selected 
directory regardless of format. "Unknown" is 
not an option in the "Place document" dialog 
box. If the file you want to place does not
have one of the file extensions listed in 
the "Format" drop-down list box, follow the 
instructions in the first paragraph on page
296 of the user manual.

=====================================
5. NUMBER OF OPEN ILLUSTRATIONS ALLOWED
=====================================
Aldus FreeHand may have up to 16 
illustrations open simultaneously, 
depending on the amount of memory 
available in Windows.

=====================================
6. ADOBE TYPE MANAGER COMPATIBILITY
=====================================
Aldus FreeHand is compatible with Adobe 
Type Manager (ATM) version 1.15 or later. 
Do not use earlier versions of ATM with 
Aldus FreeHand.

=====================================
7. COPYING A BITMAPPED IMAGE TO WINDOWS 
PAINTBRUSH
=====================================
Although you can copy and paste bitmapped 
images from Windows Paintbrush into Aldus 
FreeHand, you cannot subsequently paste 
the image from Aldus FreeHand back into 
Paintbrush. This problem occurs because 
Paintbrush does not paste graphics in 
Windows metafile (WMF) format, which is 
the format Aldus FreeHand copies to the 
Windows Clipboard.

=====================================
8. COPYING TILED FILLS BETWEEN PROGRAMS
=====================================
When you paste elements containing tiled 
fills and the tiles contain radial fills, 
the radial fills may be lost when you 
paste the elements into another Windows 
program. If you encounter this problem, 
try exporting the tile-filled elements in 
EPS format (if you will eventually print 
the illustration on a PostScript printer) 
and then importing the resulting file into 
the other program.

=====================================
9. OPENING A COMPLEX ILLUSTRATION
=====================================
If you have extremely complex files (files 
with more than 16,000 elements on a single 
layer) that were created in Aldus FreeHand 
version 3.x for Apple Macintosh computers, 
you may encounter problems opening those 
files in Aldus FreeHand version 3.0 for 
Microsoft Windows. Try solving such 
problems by grouping elements or moving 
them to different layers in Aldus FreeHand 
for the Macintosh. Aldus FreeHand for 
Windows can create or open files with as 
many as 16,000 elements or groups on a 
layer.

=====================================
10. TRANSFERRING A FILE TO ALDUS FREEHAND 
3.0 FOR MACINTOSH
=====================================
Before you open an Aldus FreeHand for 
Windows illustration file in Aldus 
FreeHand 3.0 for Apple Macintosh 
computers, you must use a file utility 
(such as DiskTop from CE Software, Inc.) 
to set the file type and creator on your 
Macintosh. Set the type and creator as 
follows:
FHD3	type
FHA3	creator

NOTE: You do not need to set the file type 
and creator if you are using version 3.1 
or higher of Aldus FreeHand for Macintosh, 
which recognises files created in Aldus 
FreeHand for Windows.

=====================================
11. PUBLISH AND SUBSCRIBE
=====================================
Because of inherent differences in 
Macintosh and IBM-compatible file formats, 
Aldus FreeHand for Windows does not 
preserve publish and subscribe information 
contained in illustrations created using 
Aldus FreeHand version 3.1 for Macintosh 
computers. If you reopen the file in Aldus 
FreeHand for the Macintosh, you will need 
to subscribe to the edition file again if 
you want Aldus FreeHand to update the 
subscriber automatically.

=====================================
12. CMYK TIFF FORMAT SUPPORTED
=====================================
In addition to RGB TIFF formats (through 
version 5.0), Aldus FreeHand supports CMYK 
TIFF. 

=====================================
13. IMPORTING A WINDOWS METAFILE (WMF)
=====================================
Aldus FreeHand supports Windows metafiles 
in version 1.0 (the format used in Windows 
1.x) format, version 3.0 format, and later 
formats only.

When you import graphics in WMF format 
(including graphics converted to WMF from 
their original format):
*patterned fills convert to grey fills.
*clipping paths convert to normal paths.
*compressed bitmaps are stripped.
*tabs convert to spaces.

In addition, lines and shading are not 
imported from Table Editor WMF files.

=====================================
14. IMPORTING AND EXPORTING ENCAPSULATED 
POSTSCRIPT (EPS) FILES THAT CONTAIN TEXT
=====================================
Normally, encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
files imported into or exported from 
Aldus FreeHand include references to 
fonts used in the graphic, but do not 
include the fonts themselves. This means
that if any fonts in the EPS file are not
resident on your printer, other fonts will 
be substituted in their place.

There are two solutions to this problem:

a) If you are exporting the EPS file
from Aldus FreeHand AND the fonts are 
Type 1 PostScript fonts, you can check 
the new "Include Type 1 fonts in EPS" 
checkbox in the "Export" dialog box, and
then click OK. You can then import the 
EPS file into Aldus FreeHand or another 
application and the Type 1 fonts in the 
EPS file will print correctly.

b) If the EPS file was created in another 
application or the fonts are TrueType,
Type 3, or any other non-Type 1 fonts, you 
can download the fonts to the printer 
using a font downloading utility, such as 
WinPSX.
Alternatively, you can force Aldus 
FreeHand or another program to download a 
font automatically by using a trigger 
character. To do this, open the document 
containing the imported EPS graphic and 
format one character with each font 
used in the graphic, positioning the 
characters somewhere on the document page. 
(A space character is a good choice, since 
it will not appear on the printed document.) 
If you are printing from Aldus FreeHand or 
PageMaker, the trigger character must be 
behind the EPS graphic, since both programs 
process printed documents from back to front. 
If you are working in a word-processing or 
other program that does not have a stacking 
order, position the trigger character prior 
to the EPS graphic.

NOTE: If the document containing the EPS 
graphic will be printed on a service 
bureau imagesetter, list the fonts used in 
the EPS graphic when you submit the print 
job, just as you normally would.

=====================================
15. DESKTOP COLOUR SEPARATIONS (DCS) FORMAT 
SUPPORTED
=====================================
To import preseparated DCS files, select 
"DCS Desktop Colour Separations" in the 
"Format" drop-down list box in the "Place 
document" dialog box. (Choose "Place..." 
from the File menu.) Select the main DCS 
file in the "Files" list box, and then 
click "OK." Separation files must be in 
the same directory as the main DCS file.

=====================================
16. MICROGRAFX DRAW (DRW) IMPORT
=====================================
Graduated and radial fills created in 
Windows Draw may lose colour information 
when imported into Aldus FreeHand. To 
correct this problem, reapply the fills in 
Aldus FreeHand.

Text in DRW files may lose alignment 
specifications or other effects when 
imported into Aldus FreeHand. To correct 
this problem, reapply the specifications 
or effects to the affected text in Aldus 
FreeHand.

DRW files adopt the Aldus FreeHand 
defaults for ruler, grid, and unit-of-
measure settings. Notes attached to 
elements in the DRW file are not 
preserved.

=====================================
17. LOTUS FREELANCE GRAPHICS (DRW) FORMAT 
IMPORT
=====================================
Like Micrografx Designer files, Lotus 
Freelance Graphics files have a .DRW 
filename extension by default. However, 
the file formats are different. 

Aldus FreeHand does not import Lotus 
Freelance Graphics files directly. To 
import Lotus Freelance Graphics files, you 
must save them in another format that 
Aldus FreeHand can import, such as CGM or 
EPS format.

=====================================
18. IMPORTING A WMF FILE FROM COREL DRAW
=====================================
If you encounter problems importing WMF 
files from Corel Draw, try exporting the 
graphic from Corel Draw in AI (Illustrator 
1.1) format instead of WMF. (Choose 
"Export..." from the Corel Draw File 
menu.)

=====================================
19. HPGL (HEWLETT-PACKARD GRAPHICS 
LANGUAGE) FILTER
=====================================
If Aldus PageMaker version 4.0 for 
Microsoft Windows or Aldus Persuasion, 
version 2.0 for Microsoft Windows is 
installed on your system, you may have 
already installed a filter for importing 
HPGL files. If so, replace that filter 
with the Aldus FreeHand "HPGL Import" 
filter. (You use Aldus Setup to decompress 
and install filters.) The HPGL filter that 
comes with Aldus FreeHand is the latest 
version available. If you later reinstall 
PageMaker or Persuasion, be sure that you 
do not inadvertently reinstall the older 
filter. The older HPGL filter allows you 
to place and open HPGL files, but the 
filter may be incorrectly listed in the 
"Open document" and "Place document" 
dialog boxes as "TXT HPGL" instead of "PLT 
HPGL Import." 

=====================================
20. CREATING A COLOUR BITMAP
=====================================
Aldus FreeHand exports only 1-bit 
(monochrome) TIFF bitmaps. If you have 
SuperPrint 2.0, however, you can create 1-
, 8-, or 24-bit TIFF, BMP, or TGA files 
from Aldus FreeHand illustrations by using 
the Zenographics SuperPrint Bitmap 
Superdriver. For more information, refer 
to your SuperPrint documentation.

=====================================
21. VIDEO CARDS AND ALDUS FREEHAND VIDEO 
BUFFERS
=====================================
24-bit video cards that use RAM (random-
access memory) for video buffers, such as 
the Mona Lisa video card, may slow 
performance if the Aldus FreeHand smooth-
draw buffers are turned on. To check or 
change this setting, select a "Smooth-
draw" option in the "More preferences" 
dialog box (Choose "Preferences" from the 
File menu, and then click "More...") 
Depending on the amount of RAM required by 
the video card and the amount of RAM in 
your computer, the video card may prevent 
Aldus FreeHand from using RAM for smooth-
draw buffers. This problem may become 
evident at any time, including when you 
open a new Aldus FreeHand illustration. 

To prevent this problem, Aldus FreeHand 
evaluates your system and sets the 
"Smooth-draw" option optimally for your 
configuration the first time you open the 
program.

=====================================
22. TIFF IMAGE DISPLAY AND MEMORY
=====================================
If a TIFF image appears in your 
illustration as a box containing an "X," 
Windows may be running low on memory. For 
suggestions about freeing memory, see 
"Out-of-memory problems" in Appendix A of 
the "Aldus FreeHand User Manual."

=====================================
23. SPEEDING PRINTING ON A PCL PRINTER
=====================================
By default, Aldus FreeHand is designed to 
speed printing on PCL printers (such as 
the Hewlett-Packard LaserJet series and 
compatibles) by bypassing the procedures 
used to print downloadable or printer-
resident PCL fonts. As a result, if you 
use these fonts in an illustration, Aldus 
FreeHand will not print the text unless 
you change this Aldus FreeHand default. 
You do this by adding a line to the 
[FreeHand3] section of the ALDUS.INI file 
(located in the \ALDUS\USENGLSH 
directory), as follows:

TwoPassPCLPrinting=1

When the TwoPassPCLPrinting option is 
turned on, Aldus FreeHand will print using 
your PCL fonts. Because PCL printers 
process graphics first and then text, PCL-
format type will always print on top of 
any graphics in your illustration. (You 
can turn off this option without removing 
it from the ALDUS.INI file by setting 
TwoPassPCLPrinting=0.)

If you use fonts with a type-management 
utility, such as Adobe Type Manager 
(version 1.15 or later) or Zenographics 
SuperPrint, text will always print, 
regardless of the TwoPassPCLPrinting 
setting. For more information about 
printing on PCL printers, see Chapter 36 
of the "Aldus FreeHand User Manual," 
"Printing on non-PostScript printers."

=====================================
24. CALIBRATING AN IMAGESETTER USING A PDX 
FILE
=====================================
Instructions for calibrating imagesetter 
output for accurate colour production are 
found in the online Help topic 
"Calibrating imagesetter output."

=====================================
25. PRINTING ILLUSTRATIONS CONTAINING 
CLIPPING PATHS
=====================================
Because of a Windows limitation, 
illustrations that contain complex 
clipping paths (such as elements pasted 
inside other elements, elements containing 
tiled fills, and rotated bitmaps) may 
print slowly on PCL and other non-
PostScript printers. In particular, 
clipping paths that contain complex 
elements (such as graduated fills) are 
susceptible to this limitation. You can 
speed printing by using a composite path 
as a mask (instead of pasting elements 
inside other elements) and by simplifying 
elements used in tiled fills.

=====================================
26. OLD CALCOMP DRIVERS MAY CAUSE CRASH
=====================================
The correct CalComp driver versions to use 
with Aldus FreeHand are:
CAL33OO.DRV dated 14 Jan 92
CAL33WIN.DLL dated 29 Dec 91

Older driver versions may cause Aldus 
FreeHand to crash when you try to launch 
the application. If you do not have the
most recent drivers, contact CalComp at 
(800) 458-5888 in the U.S. Until you receive 
the new drivers, you can use Aldus FreeHand 
by turning off the CalComp tablet and using 
a different pointer device.

=====================================
27. "NOT AN ATM FONT" WARNING MESSAGE 
AT EXPORT
=====================================
If you export an illustration as an EPS file 
and check the option "Include Type 1 fonts in 
EPS," you may receive this message:
"Font'(font name)', style '(style name)' is not
an Adobe Type Manager [ATM] font, and cannot be
included in the EPS. Install the font using ATM
or change the font to an ATM font. Cancel to
abort export."

Aldus FreeHand displays this message when the 
illustration contains fonts which are listed in 
the PostScript printer section of your WIN.INI 
but are not installed in ATM.

To export the illustration successfully, follow
this procedure:

1. Click "Cancel" in the "Export" dialog box.
2. Install the font using the ATM control panel.
3. Restart Windows and Aldus FreeHand.
4. Open the illustration and export the EPS again.

NOTE: TrueType fonts will always get this message 
and cannot be downloaded in EPS files with Aldus 
FreeHand 3.1. However, if the font is permanently 
downloaded to the printer, or downloaded by the 
application which places the EPS file, the correct 
font will still print even with the warning message.

=====================================
28. PRINTING TRUETYPE FONTS
=====================================
When using Windows 3.1, TrueType fonts will only
print to a PostScript printer when one of two 
items is checked in the "Advanced..." dialog box.

To open the "Advanced..." dialog box:

1. Choose "Printer setup..." from the File menu.
2. Make sure a PostScript printer is the selected
target printer, and then click "Setup..."
3. Click "Options..."
4. Click "Advanced..."

The two ways to ensure that the TrueType fonts
will print to a PostScript printer are:

1) Check the "Use Printer Fonts for all TrueType
fonts" option in the "TrueType Fonts" section.

2) With the "Use Substitution Table" option checked,
click on "Edit Substitution Table" and make sure
that "Download Softfont" is NOT selected. Select
specific fonts in the list box. If you have the 
options set up so that a TrueType font is downloaded 
as a soft font, the print job will fail with a 
PostScript error.  

NOTE: The Windows 3.1 default for "Use Substitution
Table" maps Helvetica to Arial, and Times to 
NewTimesRoman.  

If printing fails, use convert-to-paths as a workaround.

Similarly, if the TrueType fonts in an Aldus FreeHand 
illustration appear jagged when you print the 
illustration to a PostScript printer or when you 
export it an an EPS file, try this solution:

1. Open the illustration,
2. Choose "Printer setup..." from the File menu.
3. Make sure a PostScript printer is the selected
target printer, and then click "Setup..."
4. Click "Options..."
5. Click "Advanced..."
6. Look at the "TrueType fonts" section of the 
"Advanced" dialog box. Under the "Send to printer as:"
option, check to see if "Bitmap (Type 3)" is selected.
If it is, selecting "Adobe Type 1" from the drop-down
list box should resolve the problem.
6. Click "OK" for all the dialog boxes.
7. Print or export the illustration again.

NOTE: TrueType fonts and the "Advanced" dialog box are
only available if you are running Aldus FreeHand under
Windows 3.1. For more information about the options in
the "Advanced" dialog box for PostScript printers, see
your Microsoft Windows 3.1 documentation.

=====================================
29. PPD/PDX FILENAMES
=====================================
A complete list of the PPD/PDX files 
included with this version of Aldus 
FreeHand and the corresponding printers 
follows.

AGFA PRINTERS (201K In 16 Files)
AC500503.PPD	Agfa TabScript C500 PostScript Printer v50.3
AC500503.PDX
CG20_523.PPD	AGFA StudioSet2000 v49.3,52.3
CG20_523.PDX
CG50_523.PPD	AGFA SelectSet5000 v49.3,52.3
CG50_523.PDX
CG94_493.PPD	Agfa-Compugraphic 9400P v49.3
CG94_493.PDX
CG94_523.PPD	Agfa-Compugraphic 9400P v49.3
CG94_523.PDX
CG96_523.PPD	AGFA ProSet9600 v49.3,52.3
CG96_523.PDX
CG97_523.PPD	AGFA ProSet9700 v49.3,52.3
CG97_523.PDX
CG98_523.PPD	AGFA ProSet9800 v49.3,52.3
CG98_523.PDX

APPLE PRINTERS (109K In 18 Files)
A_PNT518.PPD	LaserWriter Personal NT v51.8
A_PNT518.PDX
APLWIIF1.PPD	LaserWriter IIf v2010.113
APLWIIF1.PDX
APLWIIG1.PPD	LaserWriter IIg v2010.113
APLWIIG1.PDX
APPLE230.PPD	Apple LaserWriter v23.0
APPLE230.PDX
APPLE380.PPD	Apple LaserWriter Plus v38.0
APPLE380.PDX
APPLE422.PPD	Apple LaserWriter Plus v42.2
APPLE422.PDX
LWNT_470.PPD	Apple LaserWriter II NT v47.0
LWNT_470.PDX
LWNTX470.PPD	Apple LaserWriter II NTX v47.0
LWNTX470.PDX
LWNTX518.PPD	Apple LaserWriter II NTX v51.8
LWNTX518.PDX

APS PRINTERS (51K In 8 Files)
APS08522.PPD	APS-PS PIP with APS-6/108
APS08522.PDX
APS12522.PPD	APS-PS PIP with LZR 1200
APS12522.PDX
APS26522.PPD	APS-PS PIP with LZR 2600
APS26522.PDX
APS80522.PPD	APS-PS PIP with APS-6/80
APS80522.PDX

AST PRINTERS (13K In 2 Files)
AST__470.PPD	AST TurboLaser/PS v47.0
AST__470.PDX

CANON PRINTERS (100K In 12 Files)
CL_500_1.PPD	Canon PS-IPU Colour Laser Copier v52.3
CL_500_1.PDX
CN_500J1.PPD	Canon PS-IPU Kanji Colour Laser Copier v52.3
CN_500J1.PDX
CNLBP4_1.PPD	Canon LBP-4 PS2 ScriptCard v51.4
CNLBP4_1.PDX
CNLBP8_1.PPD	Canon LBP-8III PS-1 v51.4
CNLBP8_1.PDX
CNLBP8R1.PPD	Canon LBP-8IIIR ScriptCard PS-1 v51.4
CNLBP8R1.PDX
CNLBP8T1.PPD	Canon LBP-8 Mark IIIT
CNLBP8T1.PDX

DATAPRODUCTS PRINTERS (52K In 6 Files)
DATAP462.PPD	Dataproducts LZR-2665 v47.0
DATAP462.PDX
DP_US470.PPD	Dataproducts LZR 1260 v47.0
DP_US470.PDX
DPLZ9601.PPD	Dataproducts LZR 960 v2010.106
DPLZ9601.PDX

EPSON PRINTERS (42K In 6 Files)
EPL3KF21.PPD	EPSON LP-3000PS F2 v52.3
EPL3KF21.PDX
EPL3KF51.PPD	EPSON LP-3000PS F5 v52.3
EPL3KF51.PDX
EPL75523.PPD	EPSON EPL-7500 v52.3
EPL75523.PDX

FUJITSU PRINTERS (13K In 2 Files)
F71RX503.PPD	Fujitsu RX7100PS
F71RX503.PDX

HP LASERJET II ADOBE PS CARTRIDGE (13K In 2 Files)
ALJII523.PPD	Adobe LaserJet II Cartridge v52.3
ALJII523.PDX

HP LASERJET II PRINTERS (29K In 4 Files)
HPIID522.PPD	HP LaserJet IID PostScript v52.2
HPIID522.PDX
HPIIP522.PPD	HP LaserJet IIP PostScript v52.2
HPIIP522.PDX

HP LASERJET III PRINTERS (58K In 8 Files)
HP3SI523.PPD	HP LaserJet IIISi PostScript v52.3
HP3SI523.PDX
HP_3D522.PPD	HP LaserJet IIID PostScript v52.2
HP_3D522.PDX
HP_3P522.PPD	HP LaserJet IIIP PostScript v52.2
HP_3P522.PDX
HPIII522.PPD	HP LaserJet III PostScript v52.2
HPIII522.PDX

HP LASERJET QMS PS or PS+ (22K In 4 Files)
QMSJ_461.PPD	QMS PS Jet v46.1
QMSJ_461.PDX
QMSJP461.PPD	QMS PS Jet Plus v46.1
QMSJP461.PDX

IBM PRINTERS (67K In 8 Files)
IBM17523.PPD	IBM 4019 v52.3 or 52.1 (17 fonts)
IBM17523.PDX
IBM20470.PPD	IBM 4216-020 v47.0
IBM20470.PDX
IBM30505.PPD	IBM 4216-030 v50.5
IBM30505.PDX
IBM39523.PPD	IBM 4019 v52.3 or 52.1 (39 fonts)
IBM39523.PDX

LINOTYPE PRINTERS (270K In 20 Files)
L100_425.PPD	Linotronic 100 v42.5
L100_425.PDX
L200_471.PPD	Linotronic 200 v47.1
L200_471.PDX
L200_493.PPD	Linotronic 200 v49.3
L200_493.PDX
L300_471.PPD	Linotronic 300 v47.1
L300_471.PDX
L300_493.PPD	Linotronic 300 v49.3
L300_493.PDX
L330_523.PPD	Linotronic 330 v52.3
L330_523.PDX
L3330523.PPD	Linotronic 330/RIP 30 v52.3
L3330523.PDX
L500_493.PPD	Linotronic 500 v49.3
L500_493.PDX
L530_523.PPD	Linotronic 530 v52.3
L530_523.PDX
L5330523.PPD	Linotronic 530/RIP 30 v52.3
L5330523.PDX

MONOTYPE PRINTERS (38K In 2 Files)
MONO_522.PPD	Monotype Imagesetter v52.2
MONO_522.PDX

NEC PRINTERS (63K In 10 Files)
N2090522.PPD	Silentwriter2 Model 90 v52.2
N2090522.PDX
N2290520.PPD	Silentwriter2 290 v52.0
N2290520.PDX
N890_470.PPD	Silentwriter LC 890 v47.0
N890_470.PDX
N890X505.PPD	Silentwriter LC 890XL v50.5
N890X505.PDX
NCOL_519.PPD	Colormate PS v51.9
NCOL_519.PDX

OC╔ PRINTERS (25K In 4 Files)
O5241503.PPD	OcΘColor PostScript Printer v50.3
O5241503.PDX
O5242503.PPD	OcΘColor G5242 PostScript Printer v50.3
O5242503.PDX

OKIDATA PRINTERS (31K In 4 Files)
OL830525.PPD	Oki OL830/PS v52.5
OL830525.PDX
OL840518.PPD	Oki OL840/PS v51.8
OL840518.PDX

PANASONIC PRINTERS (15K In 2 Files)
P4455514.PPD	Panasonic KX-P4455 v51.4
P4455514.PDX	(or Matsushita Laser Partner)

QMS PRINTERS (175K In 26 Files)
Q2200523.PPD	QMS-PS 2200
Q2200523.PDX
Q2210523.PPD	QMS-PS 2210
Q2210523.PDX
Q2220523.PPD	QMS-PS 2220
Q2220523.PDX
Q810T517.PPD	QMS-PS 810 Turbo v. 51.7
Q810T517.PDX
Q820_517.PPD	QMS-PS 820 v51.7
Q820_517.PDX
Q820T517.PPD	QMS-PS 820 Turbo v51.7
Q820T517.PDX
QCS10503.PPD	QMS ColorScript 100 Model 10 v50.3
QCS10503.PDX
QCS20503.PPD	QMS ColorScript 100 Model 20 v50.3
QCS20503.PDX
QCS30503.PPD	QMS ColorScript 100 Model 30 v50.3
QCS30503.PDX
QMS81470.PPD	QMS-PS 810 v47.0
QMS81470.PDX
QMS8_461.PPD	QMS-PS 800 v46.1
QMS8_461.PDX
QMS8P461.PPD	QMS-PS 800 Plus v46.1
QMS8P461.PDX
QMSCS494.PPD	QMS ColorScript 100 v49.3
QMSCS494.PDX

QUME PRINTERS (12K In 2 Files)
QUME_470.PPD	Qume ScripTEN v47.0
QUME_470.PDX

RICOH PRINTERS (13K In 2 Files)
R6000505.PPD	Ricoh PC Laser 6000/PS v50.5
R6000505.PDX

SCHLUMBERGER PRINTERS (12K In 2 Files)
S5232503.PPD	Schlumberger 5232 Color PostScript Printer v50.3
S5232503.PDX

SHINKO PRINTERS (12K In 2 Files)
S746J522.PPD	Shinko Color CHC-746PSJ PostScript Printer v52.2
S746J522.PDX

SCANTEXT PRINTERS (38K In 2 Files)
SCG20522.PPD	Scantext 2030/51
SCG20522.PDX

TEKTRONIX PRINTERS (42K In 6 Files)
TEKCP494.PPD	Phaser-CP v2.02
TEKCP494.PDX
TKPHZR21.PPD	Tektronix Phaser II PXi v2010.116
TKPHZR21.PDX
TKPHZR31.PPD	Tektronix Phaser III PXi v2010.116
TKPHZR31.PDX

TEXAS INSTRUMENTS PRINTERS (102K In 14 Files)
T1513470.PPD	TI 2115 13 fonts7.0
T1513470.PDX
T1535470.PPD	TI 2115 35 fonts7.0
T1535470.PDX
TI08_450.PPD	TI OmniLaser 2108 v45.0
TI08_450.PDX
TIM17521.PPD	TI microLaser PS17 v.52.1
TIM17521.PDX
TIM35521.PPD	TI microLaser PS35 v.52.1
TIM35521.PDX
TIX17521.PPD	TI microLaser XL PS17 v.52.1
TIX17521.PDX
TIX35521.PPD	TI microLaser XL PS35 v.52.1
TIX35521.PDX

UNISYS PRINTERS (49K In 6 Files)
U9415470.PPD	Unisys AP9415 v47.0
U9415470.PDX	(or LaserPrinter15)
UNI17521.PPD	Unisys AP9210 v52.1 (17 Fonts)
UNI17521.PDX
UNI39521.PPD	Unisys AP9210 v52.1 (39 Fonts)
UNI39521.PDX

VARITYPER PRINTERS (155K In 14 Files)
V5334522.PPD	Varityper Series 4000/5330
V5334522.PDX
VT42P522.PPD	Varityper 4200B-P
VT42P522.PDX
VT43P522.PPD	Varityper 4300P
VT43P522.PDX
VT530522.PPD	Varityper Series 4000/5300
VT530522.PDX
VT550522.PPD	Varityper Series 4000/5500 v52.2
VT550522.PDX
VT60P480.PPD	Varityper VT-600P v48.0
VT60P480.PDX
VT60W480.PPD	Varityper VT-600W v48.0
VT60W480.PDX
013 ALDUS FREE HAND V4.0 4×TD
README.TXT [展开]
Aldus Corporation
Aldus FreeHand 4.0 ReadMe for Microsoft Windows
June 1994

This ReadMe contains information that supplements the printed and 
online materials. 

The ReadMe is organized in the following sections:

 1. Installation considerations
 2. Network copy detection (NCD)
 3. Online Help
 4. Sample illustrations
 5. Corrections to the Aldus FreeHand 4.0 User Manual
 6. EPS file issues
 7. Text
 8. Fonts
 9. Compatibility issues when transferring files between programs
10. Using keyboard shortcuts
11. Printing issues
12. Troubleshooting program startup


==========================================================
1. INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
==========================================================

1.1 Aldus FreeHand 4.0 and PageMaker 5.0 
----------------------------------------
You can install both Aldus FreeHand 4.0 and PageMaker 5.0 on the 
same machine, without problems. They use the same spelling and 
hyphenation dictionaries. 

1.2 Aldus FreeHand 4.0 and PageMaker 4.0 
----------------------------------------
You can install Aldus FreeHand 4.0 on a machine that has 
PageMaker 4.0 installed, without problems. The Aldus FreeHand 4.0 
Installer installs updated dictionaries that PageMaker 4.0 and 
Aldus FreeHand 4.0 can share. 

We do not recommend, however, that you install PageMaker 4.0 on 
a machine that already has Aldus FreeHand 4.0 or PageMaker 5.0 
installed. PageMaker 4.0 installs and uses an earlier dictionary 
format, which does not work with Aldus FreeHand 4.0 or PageMaker 5.0. 

1.3 Fonts for Sample illustrations 
----------------------------------
To display the ALDUS.FH4 illustration with the correct fonts, 
install these fonts using Adobe Type Manager (ATM):
ò BodoniAntT,BOLD
ò FuturTLig
ò FuturTExtBol
ò FuturTLig,ITALIC

Both ATM and the fonts are included in the ATM envelope in the Aldus
FreeHand 4.0 product box. See the "ATM Quick Install Card" included 
in the ATM envelope.


==========================================================
2. NETWORK COPY DETECTION (NCD)
==========================================================

2.1 About network copy detection 
--------------------------------
Network copy detection (NCD) is included in this release of Aldus 
FreeHand. Network administrators benefit from this feature, which 
helps them ensure that users on the network are operating Aldus
FreeHand 4.0 within the legal rights granted by the Aldus Licensing 
Agreement.

2.2 Working with network copy detection
---------------------------------------
The Aldus FreeHand 4.0 license agreement permits one person to use 
a purchased copy of Aldus FreeHand at one time. Refer to the 
license agreement card in the Aldus FreeHand 4.0 box for details.

For additional licenses, contact:
Aldus Customer Services
(800) 628-2320 (US and Canadian customers)
or contact an Aldus distributor or dealer in your country.

You are responsible for ensuring that Aldus FreeHand 4.0 is used in 
accordance with the software license agreement. If you have a Novell
Netware network (version 2.15 or later), Aldus FreeHand's built-in
network copy detection helps you ensure legal usage at your site.

Each copy of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 has a unique identification number 
that identifies it on a Novell network. (Copies of Aldus 
FreeHand 4.0 installed from the same disk set have the same 
network identification number.) When a copy of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 
licensed for a single-user is started, its network identification 
number is broadcast over the network in a semaphore. Users starting 
an additional copy of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 with the same network 
identification number will be required to exit Aldus FreeHand 4.0 
immediately.

If your copy of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 is licensed for multiple users, 
the network identification number is logged in the server bindery 
along with the number of legal users allowed for that copy. Each 
time a copy with the same network identification number is started, 
the number of legal users is decreased by one. If a user starts a 
copy of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 when the number of legal users has been 
decreased to zero, that user will be required to exit Aldus 
FreeHand 4.0 immediately. (If they have been working in Aldus 
FreeHand 4.0 before they logged on to the network, they are allowed 
to save their work.)

As soon as a user exits Aldus FreeHand 4.0, the number of legal 
users for that copy increases by one. If there is a system crash 
or a power failure, the user's session is not cleared from the 
server bindery until that user starts Aldus FreeHand 4.0 again 
from the same machine and then exits.

2.3 Enabling network copy detection (Novell users only)
-------------------------------------------------------
WINBUMPS allows you to enable the network server to track multiple 
copies of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 using NCD. WINBUMPS is installed in the
ALDUS\USENGLSH\UTILITY directory when you install Aldus FreeHand 4.0.

Note: You do not need to enable the network server for NCD if you 
purchased a copy of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 licensed for a single-user.

WINBUMPS uses Novell-supplied application calls (APIs) to add an 
object (ALDUSNCD) to your server's bindery. These application calls 
are the same calls the supervisor's software uses to add new users 
and information to the bindery. (If you want, you can back up the 
server bindery before you begin.)

The ALDUSNCD object tracks information about users: their network 
card identification number, their Aldus FreeHand 4.0 network 
identification number, and the maximum number of users permitted to 
run the same copy of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 at once. You can retrieve 
this information from the server bindery with the WINBUMPS program. 
See "Monitoring network copy detection" below for details.

To enable the network server:
1. Restart your computer and log on to 
   the network. 
2. Start Windows (3.1 or later).
3. Double-click WINBUMPS.EXE in the ALDUS\USENGLSH\UTILITY 
   directory on your hard disk.
4. Choose "Show Preferred" from the Server menu 
   to confirm the name of the network server. If the 
   network server shown is not correct, run the 
   Windows File Manager and detach all network servers 
   except the one you want to enable. The network 
   server you enable for NCD is the same server on 
   which network users log in.
5. Choose "Enable Preferred" from the Server menu to 
   enable the network server for NCD.
6. Exit WINBUMPS.

2.4 Monitoring network copy detection (Novell users only)
---------------------------------------------------------
If your copy of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 is licensed for multiple users, 
you can use the WINBUMPS program to get a list of current Aldus 
FreeHand users from the server bindery. If you haven't done so 
already, you'll need to enable the network server for NCD following 
the instructions listed in "Enabling network copy detection" earlier
in this file.

To generate a report of current users:
1. Restart your computer. 
2. Start Windows (3.1 or later).
3. Double-click WINBUMPS.EXE in the ALDUS\USENGLSH\UTILITY 
   directory on your hard disk. 
4. Choose "Show Preferred" from the Server menu to 
   confirm the name of the network server. If the 
   network server shown is not correct, run the 
   Windows File Manager and detach all network 
   servers except the one you want to check. 
5. Choose "Log Info to File" from the File menu.
6. Specify a name and directory location where you 
   want the log file to be saved, and then click "OK."
7. Exit WINBUMPS.

A list of the users of all Aldus products that use NCD, the network 
identification number associated with each open copy of an Aldus 
product, and the identification number of the network card in each 
workstation is saved to the log file. To view the results, open the 
log file in a text-editing program such as Windows Notepad.

2.5 What to do if you get an alert message
------------------------------------------
Immediately save your illustration, and then exit Aldus FreeHand 4.0.
If you do not save and exit, you may lose unsaved changes to your 
illustration. You can restart Aldus FreeHand 4.0 as soon as the 
other users exit the identical copies.

2.6 Installing individual copies on workstations on a network
-------------------------------------------------------------
Installation of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 on a networked workstation is 
identical to installation on a non-networked workstation. Follow 
the procedures outlined in the "Quick Install Card" or refer to the
installation section in "Aldus FreeHand 4.0 Getting Started."

Do not install the same disk set on multiple workstations; this will
trigger the NCD alert. To avoid this, add concurrent users of 
Aldus FreeHand 4.0 as described in section 2.2. 

If you are setting up a license pack or additionally purchased 
copies of the program on a network, note which disk sets are used 
to install Aldus FreeHand 4.0 on which workstations. If you need to 
reinstall the program later, you must use the same disk set used 
for the original installation.


==========================================================
3. ONLINE HELP 
==========================================================

3.1 Online Help
---------------
To use online Help, choose a command from the Help menu. 

You can bypass the Help menu and go directly to the relevant screen 
by using context-sensitive Help. To get help for a menu command, 
press Shift+F1. When a question mark accompanies the cursor, choose 
the command for which you want help. 

Complete keyboard shortcuts are provided in online Help, which you 
can print. To print Help, choose "Print Topic" from the File menu 
in the topic you want to print.


==========================================================
4. SAMPLE ILLUSTRATIONS
==========================================================

The following sample illustrations were created in Aldus FreeHand 
and are included with the program: 
ò ALDUS.FH4
ò GUDE.FH4
ò GIOBBI.FH4
ò VIEBAHN.FH4
ò COWDEN.FH4
ò HORNANDE.FH4
ò LOMBART.FH4
ò FESTA.FH4

The first seven illustrations were produced by designers for their 
clients and are featured in printed form in the "Aldus FreeHand 4.0 
User Manual." Information on the pasteboard of each electronic file 
suggests how you might investigate the illustrations construction. 
Please respect the artists copyrights and use these images for 
instructional viewing only, not for printing.

The ALDUS.FH4 illustration, the tutorials FESTA.FH4 illustration, 
and portions of the VIEBAHN.FH4 illustration were created in Aldus 
FreeHand 4.0. All other sample illustrations were created in earlier 
versions of Aldus FreeHand and converted to version 4.0. 

To open a sample illustration:
1. Install Aldus FreeHand 4.0, the Sample illustrations, 
   and these fonts: BodoniAntT,BOLD, FuturTLig, 
   FuturTExtBol, and FuturTLig,ITALIC. 
2. In the FH4ART directory in the FH4 directory, 
   double-click the illustration file you want to open. 
3. Select "Better (but slower) display" in the 
   "Preferences" dialog box for high-resolution display 
   of the illustration. 

Note: On the "Color list" palette in two illustrations--LOMBART.FH4 
and GUDE.FH4--you'll see Aldus FreeHand's default colors in two 
languages.


==========================================================
5. CORRECTIONS TO THE ALDUS FREEHAND 4.0 USER MANUAL
==========================================================

5.1 Page 102: "Importing and exporting colors"
----------------------------------------------
In addition to the color-matching libraries listed in the User Manual,
you can choose from two more predefined libraries: 
ò Greys--includes tints of black from 1 to 99% in both 
  spot and process color models.
ò Crayon--includes the colors found in a typical 64-color 
  box of crayons.

Both libraries are included as examples of custom libraries, which 
have a filename that ends with an .ACF extension. Unlike a color-
matching library, which has a filename that ends with a .BCF 
extension, a custom library is an ASCII text file that you can 
open and edit in a text editor.

5.2 Page 188: "OLE: Object linking and embedding (Windows)"
-----------------------------------------------------------
When you want to paste an Aldus FreeHand 4.0 object into another 
program as an OLE-linked object, be sure to save the Aldus FreeHand 
illustration in which you created the object before you copy the 
object to the Clipboard. If you do not save the illustration, the 
object will not link to the destination program.

5.3 Page 201: "To convert an earlier-version illustration to 
version 4.0"
------------------------------------------------------------
To convert an Aldus FreeHand 3.x file in Windows, after Step 1 choose
"FreeHand 3.0/3.1 files" in the "List files of type" drop-down list. 
Then continue with Step 2.

5.4 Page 166-167: "Simulating a transparent object"
---------------------------------------------------
An easier technique for simulating transparency was added to the 
program after the User Manual was printed. 

To simulate a transparent path:
1. Select two closed, overlapping paths that have 
   "Basic" fills applied to them. 
2. Press Alt as you choose "Intersect" from the 
   "Path operations" submenu on the Arrange menu.
3. Specify the opacity of the object in front, and 
   then click "OK." Aldus FreeHand creates a new object 
   in front of the two overlapping objects.


==========================================================
6. EPS FILE ISSUES 
==========================================================

If you created an Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file using the 
Windows version of Aldus FreeHand 4.0 (or another Windows or MS-DOS
program), transferred it to the Macintosh, and you cannot locate the
file using the "Open..." or "Place..." command in Aldus FreeHand 4.0
for the Macintosh, make sure the filename ends with an ".EPS" 
extension.

An EPS file created in Aldus FreeHand 4.0, with the Aldus FreeHand 
illustration embedded, cannot be placed in an illustration created 
in Aldus FreeHand 2.0 for the Macintosh.

An EPS file created in Aldus FreeHand 4.0, with the Aldus FreeHand 
illustration embedded, cannot be opened in Aldus PrePrint 1.5.1 for 
the Macintosh.

To open an Aldus FreeHand 4.0 file in Adobe Photoshop or Adobe 
Dimensions, use the Adobe Illustrator 3.0 export format. 


==========================================================
7. TEXT 
==========================================================

7.1 Converting text to paths
----------------------------
If text overflows a text block, and you convert the text to paths, 
only the visible text is converted to paths. The rest of the text 
is lost. To avoid losing text, resize the text block or copyfit to 
see the remaining text before converting to paths. 

7.2 Overprinting text
---------------------
By default, Aldus FreeHand overprints black text. 

To manually control overprinting of text, or to overprint text that 
is not black:
1. Select the Text tool, then select the text 
   you want to overprint.
2. Display the Fill or Stroke Inspector.
3. Check "Overprint" to turn it on.


==========================================================
8. FONTS 
==========================================================

8.1 Stone Print fractions
-------------------------
To type a fraction using Stone Print fonts:
1. In Program Manager, open the Accessories 
   program group. Double-click the character map icon 
   and choose "StonePrintFractions" from the Font menu.
2. Select a numerator by double-clicking on the number 
   you want in the second row of characters.
3. Type a slash for the fraction bar.
4. Select a denominator by double-clicking on the 
   number you want in the third row.
5. Click "Copy."
6. Switch to Aldus FreeHand 4.0, click an insertion 
   point in the illustration where you want to insert 
   the fraction, and choose "Paste" from the Edit menu. 

8.2 Displaying fonts properly in palettes and menus
---------------------------------------------------
If fonts in palettes and menus display badly in Aldus FreeHand 4.0,
try a setting that uses small fonts in your Windows 3.1 display 
driver. Settings using large fonts may not display well in Aldus 
FreeHand 4.0. 

To use small fonts in palettes and menus, open the Main program 
group and double-click Windows Setup. Choose "Change System 
Settings..." from the Options menu and then select a Display option 
that uses small fonts and is appropriate for your video card and 
monitor.


==========================================================
9. COMPATIBILITY ISSUES WHEN TRANSFERRING FILES BETWEEN 
PROGRAMS 
==========================================================

Chapter 8 of the "Aldus FreeHand 4.0 User Manual" describes important
considerations when importing or exporting files between Aldus 
FreeHand 4.0 and other programs. By studying the techniques and
methods in that chapter, you will avoid many problems. Additional 
considerations follow. 

9.1 Adobe Illustrator 1.1 file format
-------------------------------------
Objects you create in Adobe Illustrator and save in Adobe 
Illustrator 1.1 format may not import to Aldus FreeHand 4.0 as 
expected. For better results, try using Adobe Illustrator 88 or 3.0.
When you save an Adobe Illustrator object in Adobe Illustrator 1.1 
format:
ò A text block with multiple text attributes 
  imports as multiple text blocks.
ò Text imports separately from the text block. Text 
  becomes a group and its associated text block 
  becomes a rectangle. The two are then grouped 
  together. If text attributes change, all of the 
  text blocks are grouped together before they 
  are grouped with the rectangle.
ò Text blocks always import with word and letter 
  spacing of 100%. 
ò Text blocks always import with a letter spacing 
  of 0% for regular type and 50% for boldface type. 
  Also, if text with a larger letter spacing flows 
  between lines, it is not reflowed from the lower 
  line to the upper line. 

In addition, Illustrator 1.1 format does not convert the following:
arrowheads; compound paths; fully justified text; inhibit 
hyphenation; insets; keeping lines together or on the same line; 
leading after a paragraph; paragraph spacing below; linked text, 
columns and rows; text effects; text wrap-around value; masked 
objects; word and letter spacing with minimum, optimum, and maximum
percentage (just single-value word and letter spacing); multiple 
pages; RGB colors; color names; overprinting; patterned fills and
strokes; and tiled fills and strokes.  

9.2 Aldus IntelliDraw 1.0 or Aldus PhotoStyler/Gallery Effects 
Accessory Pack
--------------------------------------------------------------
If you have Aldus IntelliDraw 1.0 or the Aldus PhotoStyler/Gallery 
Effects Accessory Pack installed on your system when you install 
Aldus FreeHand 4.0, you will have conflicts between versions of the 
ALDVM.DLL and ALDVMRES.RSL support files required by these 
applications. Aldus FreeHand 4.0 installs a utility that resolves 
the conflict by updating the files so that the applications can 
share them. 

After installing Aldus FreeHand 4.0, take the following steps:
1. In File Manager, locate the ALDUS\USENGLSH\UTILITY
   directory. 
2. Double-click the IDUPDATE.EXE. 
3. For each file update message, click "OK" as prompted, 
   or follow the instructions on screen.
4. When the utility notifies you that the update 
   process is complete, click "OK."

You can now run your Aldus applications. 

9.3 Placing a CorelDRAW! Windows metafile
-----------------------------------------
If you place a Windows metafile (.WMF) created by CorelDRAW!, you 
may not be able to place it by clicking the loaded icon in your 
Aldus FreeHand 4.0 illustration. Instead, drag the loaded icon to 
the size you want the metafile to be in your illustration. 

9.4 Placing a DXF file
----------------------
If you place a .DXF file, arcs and circles do not import correctly. You may 
achieve better results by using a utility to convert the file to .CGM format 
before placing it in Aldus FreeHand 4.0.

9.5 Exporting to Aldus FreeHand 3.1 file format
-----------------------------------------------
If you export an illustration containing more than one TIFF image 
from Aldus FreeHand 4.0 for the Macintosh or Windows to the version 
3.1 format, and you open the illustration in Aldus FreeHand 3.1 for 
Windows, you may only be asked to re-link the first TIFF image as 
the illustration opens. The program will ask you to re-link the 
remaining unlinked TIFF images only when you print. If each TIFF 
image is stored in a different directory, version 3.1 will prompt 
you properly. One side effect of this is that you may not be able 
to preview TIFF images until you relink them at print time. 

9.6 Exporting as an EPS file
----------------------------
If you export a path that uses the "Pattern" stroke type as an 
EPS file, the stroke width of the pattern stroke does not scale 
when you resize the EPS file in another program.

9.7 Exporting color to a Windows metafile
-----------------------------------------
If you export an Aldus FreeHand 4.0 illustration as a Windows 
metafile and it contains unnamed colors, the unnamed colors will 
shift. To preserve the integrity of colors in exported metafiles, 
name all the colors in your illustration before exporting. 

9.8 Exporting as a TIFF file
----------------------------
ò If you export an Aldus FreeHand 4.0 illustration as a TIFF 
  file, the exported file includes all objects on all pages and on 
  the pasteboard. The outermost objects in the illustration determine 
  the dimensions of the TIFF file. 

  To save time and memory, decide which objects you want to export as 
  a TIFF file, copy only those objects into an otherwise empty Aldus 
  FreeHand illustration, and then export the TIFF file from the new 
  illustration. 

ò If you export an Aldus FreeHand 4.0 illustration as a TIFF 
  file, in the "TIFF export" dialog box select a bit depth that is  
  supported by your video display adapter, otherwise the exported TIFF 
  file will display unsatisfactorily. For example, if your display 
  adapter supports only 8-bit color, do not select 24-bit color.


==========================================================
10. USING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS 
==========================================================

10.1 When keyboard shortcuts have no effect
-------------------------------------------
If you use a keyboard shortcut and it has no effect, the illustration
window may not be the active window. Some keyboard shortcuts require
that the illustration window be active. The title bar of an active 
window or palette displays the "Active Title Bar" color as set in 
the Color Control Panel in the Main program group in Program Manager.
Try either of the following keyboard shortcuts to activate the 
illustration window:
ò Press Enter.
ò Press Control+Tab to cycle through windows and 
  palettes until the illustration window is active.

10.2 "Save as..." keyboard shortcut conflicts with After Dark
-------------------------------------------------------------
FreeHand uses Control+Shift+S for "Save as...." This is the same as
the default keyboard shortcut set to turn on sleep mode in Berkeley
Systems After Dark screen saver.

To change After Dark's keyboard shortcut:
1. Open After Dark, click "Setup..." and then 
   click "Hot Key...."
2. Either uncheck "Sleep Hot Key" or specify a 
   new keyboard shortcut that does not conflict 
   with any keyboard shortcut in the programs you use.
3. Click "OK" to exit the dialog box, and then click 
   "OK" again. Then minimize After Dark.


==========================================================
11. PRINTING ISSUES
==========================================================

11.1 Apple LaserWriter IIg paper sizes
--------------------------------------
If you have trouble printing to the Apple LaserWriter IIg printer, 
check the selected paper size. Each paper size is listed in three 
ways, for example:
ò US Letter(Letter.8Meg)
ò US Letter(Letter.4Meg)
ò US Letter(Letter.5Meg)

Select the paper size that corresponds to the amount of memory in 
your printer. For example. (Letter.8Meg) if your LaserWriter IIg 
has 8 megabytes of RAM installed.

11.2 Printer-specific features
------------------------------
To adjust settings for printer-specific features not displayed in 
the Print Options dialog box in Aldus FreeHand 4.0 (such as 
duplexing):
1. In your illustration, choose "Printer setup..." 
   from the File menu.
2. Click "Setup," and adjust settings.

11.3 Printing to PCL Printers
-----------------------------
Aldus FreeHand 4.0 is primarily a PostScript output program. 
In order to get an accurate printed preview of the file, use 
a PostScript device for proofing. PostScript custom fills will 
print only to a PostScript device: they will print as gray or 
black solid fills when printed to a PCL printer.

Other known problems when using PCL printers:

PCL-5E
ò Set the driver to Raster Graphics mode, 
  not HPGL-2
ò Performance will be somewhat slower printing 
  to PCL-5E than PCL-5. If faster printing performance
  is desired, target the printer as a PCL-5 device,
  such as the Hewlett-Packard LaserJet III. If you do 
  this, however, some device-specific options, such as 
  600 dpi printing, will not be available.

PCL-5C
ò File sizes may be very large.
ò Aldus FreeHand 4.0 does not work with Hewlett-Packard 
  ColorSmart. Instead, select "Manual Color" in the 
  Printer Setup dialog box.
ò Printing may be slow. If your printer has a 
  PostScript option, select that rather than PCL-5C.
ò Scaling using the print driver will cause the image 
  to shift and may crop the image. Scale objects in 
  the illustration file to achieve the desired result.
ò Radial fills will print as black circles or with 
  small line fragments, depending on the printer you use.

PCL-3
ò Bitmap patterns fills, PostScript custom fills, and 
  transformed text that is pasted inside an object will 
  print incorrectly.

Fax printing
ò Aldus FreeHand 4.0 does not print to Delrina WinFax PRO 
  or Intel FAXibility software.


==========================================================
12. Troubleshooting program startup
==========================================================

If you have trouble starting Aldus FreeHand 4.0 because the program 
cannot enable OLE features, you can try these techniques to resolve the 
problem: 
ò Make sure your AUTOEXEC.BAT file includes a line that runs the DOS file-
  sharing extension SHARE.EXE. In many cases this alone solves the problem.
ò Delete the file WINDOWS\REG.DAT.
ò Reinstall the files WINDOWS\SYSTEM\OLECLI.DLL and 
  WINDOWS\SYSTEM\OLESVR.DLL.
014 ALDUS GALLERY EFFECT F/W 2×HD
README.TXT [展开]
ALDUS« GALLERY EFFECTS(tm): CLASSIC ART
ReadMe


DONÆT ALTER INSTALLED FILES
Other than moving or copying the installed files as 
mentioned on the Installation Card, you should not 
move or delete any of the files installed by Gallery 
Effects. For example, you should not move or delete 
the items that are installed in the ALDUS or 
CLASSIC.GE directories.

________________________________________


INFORMATION ON USING THE EFFECTS

IMAGE MAY APPEAR DARK AFTER 
APPLYING CERTAIN EFFECTS
If you apply certain effects to an image in which 
there is not much variation in brightness, the image 
may appear very dark. In particular, this may occur 
with Fresco, Dark Strokes, and Watercolor, since 
these effects are best suited for images with a wide 
variation in brightness.


PREVIEW MAY NOT LOOK EXACTLY LIKE FINAL RESULT
The preview in the Effect Settings dialog box 
corresponds as closely as possible to how the effect 
will look when applied to the entire image or 
selection. With some effects and images, there can be 
a discrepancy between the preview and the final 
result. This is because the preview shows the effect 
as it appears on a portion of the image or selection. 
To obtain a better indication of the final result, 
preview several different areas of the image before 
applying the effect to the image.


IF PREVIEW FRAME IS NOT EASILY VISIBLE IN PREVIEW
In rare cases, if you are working with an image 
containing a lot of noise, the preview frame in the 
Effect Settings dialog box may not be easily visible 
in the preview. The preview frame is actually there, 
but may not be easily visible because of the visual 
interaction with the image in the preview. To move 
the preview frame, move the pointer over the center 
of the preview, the cursor will change to a four-way 
arrow allowing you to move the preview frame.

________________________________________


INFORMATION ON THE GALLERY EFFECTS APPLICATION

NUMBERS MAY BE ROUNDED IN DOCUMENT INFO 
DIALOG BOX
When specifying an image size in the New Document 
and Resize Document dialog boxes, in any unit of 
measurement other pixels, the numbers will be 
rounded to the nearest whole pixel value. Thus, the 
sizes in the Document Info dialog box may differ 
very slightly from what you specified.


IF SMALL WHITE AREAS APPEAR WHEN 
PASTING INTO A SELECTION
In some instances, pasting an irregular selection into 
another irregular selection may cause very small 
white areas to appear. If this occurs, try using the 
rectangle selection tool to select the image you want to 
paste and then paste it into the irregular selection.


SELECTIONS WITH OPTA MONALISA OR 
RADIUS MULTIVIEW 24 CARD
When using the Opta MonaLisa or Radius MultiView 
24 graphics card, selections may blink on and off 
instead of appearing as moving dashed lines 
(marquee).

________________________________________


INFORMATION FOR ALDUS« PHOTOSTYLER(tm) 1.1 USERS

IF AN IMAGE TURNS A SOLID COLOR, WHITE, OR 
BLACK AFTER APPLYING AN EFFECT 
Several effects (Charcoal, Chalk and Charcoal, and 
Graphic Pen) use PhotoStylerÆs foreground and 
background colors when applying the effect. If both 
the foreground and background colors are the same 
color or both white or black, the image will appear 
that color, white or black when applying one of the 
above three effects. You should make sure that
the foreground color and the background color
are different prior to applying one of these 
three effects.

________________________________________


FOR FRACTAL DESIGN PAINTER(tm) 1.2 USERS

EFFECTS CANNOT BE PERFORMED ON MOVED OR 
PASTED SELECTIONS
If you paste a selection into a document or move an 
existing selection, you can choose an effect but 
nothing happens. To overcome this problem, you 
should deselect the current selection and then reselect it 
prior to choosing an effect.


EFFECTS CANNOT BE APPLIED TO FRISKETS
Even though the effects can be selected from the 
Filter cascading menu when a frisket is present, 
Painter does not apply the effects to the frisket.


FRISKET GETS CREATED AFTER APPLYING AN EFFECT
If you make a selection and apply an effect, Painter 
creates a frisket from the selection. If you want to 
paint as usual, clear or shut off the frisket.


NARROW VERTICAL LINE MAY APPEAR AFTER 
APPLYING AN EFFECT
After an effect is applied on a rectangular selection 
(not the entire image), a vertical line may appear at 
the left edge of the deselected image.


THE END
015 ALDUS PAGEAHEAD F/W 2×HD
README.TXT [展开]
Aldus Corporation
Aldus PageMaker Database Edition
May 1, 1992

README.TXT

This file contains information that became 
available after the PageAhead User Manual 
was printed. You may wish to print this 
file and keep it with your PageAhead User 
Manual. To read this document online, use 
the Notepad "Search..." command when 
looking up particular topics.

README.TXT contains information about:

1.  INSTALLING PAGEAHEAD
2.  SAMPLE FILES INCLUDED WITH PAGEAHEAD
3.  CORRECTIONS TO THE PAGEAHEAD USER 
	MANUAL
4.  GRAPHICS
5.  MOVING COLUMNS
6.  OUT-OF-MEMORY PROBLEMS
7.  MODIFYING SEPARATOR AND CHARACTER 
	WEIGHT TABLES
8.  WORKING WITH LARGE DATABASES
9.  DELIMITERS IN TEXT (ASCII) FILES
10.  LEADER TABS IN PAGEMAKER
11.  TIFF (TAG IMAGE FORMAT FILE) IMAGES
12.  COLUMN NAME "FROM" NOT ALLOWED
13.  PLACING SETUP FILE WHILE IT IS OPEN
14.  SIDE-BY-SIDE PARAGRAPHS MISALIGNING 
IN 	PAGEMAKER
15.  BLANK ROWS IN EXCEPTION AND 
	REPLACEMENT TABLES
16.  REPLACING UNMATCHED TEXT COLUMN 
	CELLS WITH A NULL VALUE


=====================================
1.  INSTALLING PAGEAHEAD
=====================================
Be sure to add the directory containing 
PageAhead to the PATH statement in your 
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. The Aldus Setup program 
lets you do this automatically when you 
install PageAhead. If you decline to let 
Aldus Setup update your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, 
you'll need to update the file yourself 
before running PageAhead, so the program 
can find the .DLL and other files it 
needs. (Restart your computer after 
modifying AUTOEXEC.BAT.)

If you are installing PageAhead on a
computer which has a non-English version of
PageMaker, you must perform the following
steps to make PageAhead work with PageMaker:
1. Install PageAhead as instructed on the
   installation card.
2. Locate the file PAIMP.FLT in the directory
   \ALDUS\UKENGLSH\FILTERS. Move this file to
   the language directory which represents 
   the version of PageMaker you have
   installed. For example, if you have
   Swedish PageMaker, move this file into
   \ALDUS\SVENSKA\FILTERS.
3. Locate the file ALDUS.INI in your
   PageMaker language directory (e.g.,
   \ALDUS\SVENSKA\ALDUS.INI). Open this file
   in Windows Notepad. 
4. Add the following line to the 
   [AldusImports] section of the ALDUS.INI 
   file:
        PageAhead Import=PAIMP4.FLT,PA1
5. Save ALDUS.INI. Exit Windows, and restart
   your computer to get all the changes.
 
=====================================
2.  SAMPLE FILES INCLUDED WITH PAGEAHEAD
=====================================
Several sample files are included with 
PageAhead. They are:

FILES			CONTENTS
----------		----------------
CAT_PS.PT4		Setup and example files
CAT_PS.PM4		used in the PageAhead
CAT_LJ2.PT4		tutorial, which is part
CAT_LJ2.PM4		of PageAhead online
CAT_LJ3.PT4		Help.
CAT_LJ3.PM4		

TUTORIAL.PA1		PageAhead setup
			file used in 
			the tutorial.

COURSES.DBF		Sample database files
PROFS.DBF		used in the tutorial and 
			in examples in the 
			PageAhead User Manual.

These files are installed in the 
\PM4\PA\TUTORIAL directory (unless you 
install PageAhead in another directory).

=====================================
3.  CORRECTIONS TO THE PAGEAHEAD USER 
MANUAL
=====================================
The PageAhead User Manual does not include 
information about options available when 
you query text-format (ASCII) database 
tables. For information about these 
options, refer to the online Help topic 
"Creating a Query table." 

Page 29: The last sentence of the third
paragraph should read:
For more information about keywords, see
Chapters 4 and 5 of this manual.

Page 32: Arguments to string functions must
be enclosed in parenthesis, not brackets. 
Thus, the first example on the page should
read:
     RTRIM(FIRSTNAME)
For more information, see "Text functions" 
topic in online Help.

Page 39: The table does not contain a 
description of the "Convert output to 
ANSI" option in the "Query Preferences" 
dialog box. This option causes PageAhead 
to use the international ANSI character 
set instead of ASCII. This option is 
useful for databases containing non-
English-language characters, but is not 
normally needed for English-language 
databases.

Page 91: The fourth paragraph should read: 
To change several attributes at a time, 
choose the "Character..." command from the 
Format menu.
 
=====================================
4.  GRAPHICS
=====================================
Currently, PageMaker has difficulty 
importing BMP-format graphic files when: 
1. A setup file contains more than one 
type of graphic file format, and 
2. BMP files are not the last files to be 
imported. 
In other words, when importing a setup 
file that contains references to BMP and 
other graphic file types, all BMP graphics 
must occur after all other graphic 
filenames in the setup file, or PageMaker 
may not place the setup file. You can 
avoid this problem by converting BMP files 
to other formats, or by arranging your 
setup file so that BMP files occur after 
all other graphics files.
 
=====================================
5.  MOVING COLUMNS
=====================================
Currently, when you move a column using 
the mouse, tables do not scroll 
horizontally. If you encounter this 
problem, you may find cutting the column 
and pasting it into its new location more 
convenient than dragging it.
 
=====================================
6.  OUT-OF-MEMORY PROBLEMS
=====================================
Occasionally, Windows may run out of 
memory while PageAhead is placing a setup 
file into PageMaker, which is a memory-
intensive operation. In some cases, 
PageAhead may suspend data retrieval and 
display a warning message. Most often, 
this problem occurs when other Windows 
applications are running. To solve the 
problem, close other applications to free 
memory, and then try to place the setup 
file again.
 
=====================================
7.  MODIFYING SEPARATOR AND CHARACTER 
WEIGHT TABLES
(DEFAULT.ST1 and DEFAULT.WT1)
=====================================
If you modify the default Separator and 
Character Weight tables that come with 
PageAhead, we recommend that you keep 
backup copies of the original files in a 
safe place on your hard disk. Otherwise, 
if you need to use the original versions 
of these files you'll need to install them 
again from the original PageAhead 
installation disks using the Aldus Setup 
program. (Start ALDSETUP.EXE on the 
PageAhead installation disk, choose 
"Single file copy" from the File menu in 
the Aldus Setup main window, and select 
the file you want to install.) Because the 
files are compressed, you must use the 
Aldus Setup program to install them on 
your hard disk.
 
=====================================
8.  WORKING WITH LARGE DATABASES
=====================================
When you query a large database, some 
operations, such as moving columns 
containing many formatting attributes, can 
slow PageAhead noticeably. You can work 
more quickly if you limit the size of your 
database queries until you are ready to 
produce the final version of your 
database. You can limit the size of the 
query using the "Restrict number of rows 
to" option in the "Query Preferences" 
dialog box (choose "Preferences..." from 
the Query menu). When you are ready to 
place the setup file, remove the 
restriction, close the setup file, and 
place the file in PageMaker.
 
PageAhead can accommodate a maximum of 128 
columns (fields) in .DBF (dBASE) files, 
and up to 255 columns in text (ASCII) 
files. If you encounter a table larger 
than these limits, split the table in your 
DBMS and select columns from the resulting 
tables using the PageAhead join feature. 
For more information, refer to "Joining 
related tables to combine information," in 
Chapter 2 of the PageAhead User Manual.
 
=====================================
9.  DELIMITERS IN TEXT (ASCII) FILES
=====================================
PageAhead accepts the following delimiters 
when querying character-separated text 
(ASCII) files:

	, 	comma 
	" 	quotation mark
	` 	accent grave
	! 	exclamation mark 
	$  	dollar sign 
	^ 	carat
	& 	ampersand 
	- 	hyphen 
	_ 	underline 


=====================================
10.  LEADER TABS IN PAGEMAKER
=====================================
Under certain circumstances, leader tabs 
in PageMaker 4.0 can cause an 
Unrecoverable Application Error (UAE), 
potentially resulting in the loss of work. 
Because your work with PageAhead may 
involve leader tabs, you should be aware 
of this problem and take steps to avoid it 
when using leader tabs.

The PageMaker 4.0 leader tab UAE occurs 
when strings of text delimited by leader 
tabs are so close together that the leader 
character does not display. You can avoid 
this problem by leaving adequate space 
between leader tabs when you create 
PageMaker styles. After importing your 
PageAhead setup file, you can adjust tab 
positions between the tabbed items. 
Alternatively, set tabs, but not leaders, 
until after you place and arrange the data 
in PageMaker. Then switch to leader tabs 
when you have assured that text in your 
columns does not obscure leaders.

You may wish to place a small portion of 
your database into PageMaker to test 
whether your columns allow sufficient 
space to avoid this problem. (You can 
limit the number of rows placed into your  
PageMaker publication by pressing Shift 
before you click "OK" in the PageMaker 
"Place file" dialog box. The "PageAhead 
Filter Preferences" dialog box opens, in 
which you can specify the number of rows 
to import.)

=====================================
11.  TIFF (TAG IMAGE FORMAT FILE) IMAGES
=====================================
If you resize a TIFF file in PageAhead 
(using the "Graphic" command on the Format 
menu), PageMaker cannot establish a link to 
the original TIFF file when you place the 
setup file in PageMaker. To solve this problem,
relink to the original TIFF file from within
PageMaker (using the "Links..." command 
on the File menu). Or, size the TIFF file in 
the original application before placing it 
in either PageAhead or PageMaker.

Also, Macintosh-format TIFF files from certain 
programs will not import at all into PageMaker
if they have been resized in PageAhead. If the
import fails, resize the image to final size
in the original application, or re-create your 
file using Aldus SuperPaint or Aldus PhotoStyler.

=====================================
12.  COLUMN NAME "FROM" NOT ALLOWED
=====================================
PageAhead cannot query correctly if a 
database contains a column named "FROM." 
Rename such a column in your DBMS before 
querying the database.

=====================================
13.  PLACING SETUP FILE WHILE IT IS OPEN
=====================================
PageMaker will not force a query of the 
database when you place a setup file if 
the Answer table for that setup file is 
open. Instead, PageMaker will import only 
the data currently in the Answer table. To 
solve this problem, close a setup file 
before placing it in PageMaker.
 
=====================================
14.  SIDE-BY-SIDE PARAGRAPHS MISALIGNING 
IN PAGEMAKER
=====================================
Side-by-side paragraphs to which you have 
applied heading control (using the 
"Heading Control" command on the Work 
menu) can misalign when you import them 
into PageMaker 4.0. To solve this problem 
and maintain proper tab alignment:

1. Insert a literal column to the right of 
the header control column.  This literal 
column should have the same paragraph 
formatting as the header control column. 
(You insert a literal column using the 
"Add Literal Column..." command on the 
Work menu.)

2. Select the Literal column, and then 
choose "Suppress Column" from the Work 
menu. Select "Conditional" for the 
"Suppress" option in the "Suppress Column" 
dialog box, and then add the header column 
to the "Any of these has data" list box, 
so that when the information in the header 
column is suppressed, the literal column 
is not. Select the "Data and layout" 
option.

3. Select the header column, and then 
choose "Suppress Column" from the Work 
menu. Select "Conditional" for the 
"Suppress" option in the "Suppress Column" 
dialog box, and add the header column to 
the "Any of these is empty" list box, so 
that it will be suppressed if there is no 
data in the column (a null value). Select 
the "Data and layout" option.

4. Click "OK."

=====================================
15.  BLANK ROWS IN EXCEPTION AND 
REPLACEMENT TABLES
=====================================
Blank rows in the middle of Exception and 
Replacement tables can prevent PageAhead 
from recognising information that occurs 
below the blank row. You can remove blank 
rows using the "Delete Rows" command on 
the Table Utility Edit menu.

=====================================
16.  REPLACING UNMATCHED TEXT COLUMN CELLS 
WITH A NULL VALUE
=====================================
To replace unmatched text column cells 
with a null value:

1. Specify a text pattern replacement in 
the "Replace Data" dialog box (choose 
"Replace..." from the Work menu).

2. Add a row to the bottom of the current 
replacement table. Then enter a single * 
(asterisk) in the "From" column and 
nothing in the "To" column. (The "If no 
match, replace with" option in the 
"Replace Data" dialog box will not accept 
a blank line as a null replacement string. 
Instead, it assumes that a blank means no 
string.)
016 中文 Photo Styler V1.0 3×HD
README.TXT [展开]
********************************************************************
   U-Lead PhotoStyler V1.0 Release Special Information  April,1991
********************************************************************

This file contains the following information:

   - Setting up PhotoStyler for the first time
   - Updating PhotoStyler
   - Note on 16-color VGA display adapter
   - Note on running in real mode with EMM386 driver
   - Installing the Microtek scanner driver
   - Microtek scanner operation help
   - Using fonts with PhotoStyler
   - Special File Format Note
   - Miscellaneous
   - Contents of the installed directory

To read this file:

   - Use the PgUp/PgDn keys to see the next/previous page.
   - Press Ctrl+Home keys to return to the top of the file.
   - Press Ctrl+End keys to jump to the end of the file.
   - Double-click on the system menu box to finish viewing this file.

If you have any comments about PhotoStyler, its documentation, or any
part of its presentation, good or bad, please contact us at:

   U-Lead Systems, Inc.
   680 Knox Street
   Torrance, CA 90502
   Tel: (213) 538-8911
   Fax: (213) 538-2254

***********************************************************


=========================================
Setting up PhotoStyler for the first time
=========================================

   Please run PSSETUP.EXE on Disk 1 (Program Disk) to install
PhotoStyler (using the File/Run command in the Program Manager). It
is a MS-Windows program. Enter the target directory in which you want
to install PhotoStyler, and then press OK. For further details, please
see section 2.1, "Installing PhotoStyler" of "Getting Started and
Tutorials". When the program has been loaded onto your disk, the
installation program can generate a PhotoStyler group containing 3 icons.
If you decide you don't want a separate group, you can generate the icon
in the MS-Windows program manager using the New command in the file
menu. (See MS-Windows User Guide for further details.)


=======================================
Updating PhotoStyler
=======================================

   If you want to update part, but not all, of PhotoStyler, e.g., a
new scanner driver, run PSSETUP.EXE, and select the "Update" option.
The path to the PhotoStyler directory must be entered correctly. When
you have completed updating the selected part, click Exit to return
to the program manager.


=======================================
Note on 16-color VGA display adapter
=======================================

   If you run PhotoStyler in a 16-color Windows display environment,
PhotoStyler checks your display adapter for VGA hardware compatibility
to ensure it displays 16 shades of gray for gray scale images. If you
encounter any problems during the loading of PhotoStyler in this
environment, please add the following statements to the PSTYLER.INI
file:

        [Internal]
        VGABIOS=0       ; to disable VGA compatibility checking


===============================================
Note on running in real mode with EMM386 driver
===============================================

   If you run PhotoStyler in Windows real mode and install Expanded
memory with the EMM386 driver in the CONFIG.SYS file, we suggest you
open Windows using WIN /n/r. This should eliminate potential
problems caused by not enough memory.


=======================================
Installing the Microtek scanner driver
=======================================

   A statement must be added to C:\CONFIG.SYS for the scanner driver.
The setup program will ask you if you want it to be added for you. If
you choose Yes, you have a chance to view the contents of C:\CONFIG.SYS
and back it up. If you choose No, you should add the following statement
to C:\CONFIG.SYS yourself:

      device=c:\pstyler\mscan.sys

   If your PhotoStyler directory is not C:\PSTYLER, use your PhotoStyler
target directory instead.

NOTE: You must REBOOT the system, once this statement has been added,
before scanning.


=======================================
Microtek scanner operation help
=======================================

   If you have installed a Microtek scanner with PhotoStyler, you can
get the Microtek scanner operation "Help" from the PhotoStyler Help: Scanner
menu.


=======================================
Using fonts with PhotoStyler
=======================================

   PhotoStyler works with the Windows screen fonts that you have
installed. To improve the quality of screen fonts at larger size, you
can use screen font generation utilities.


============================
Special File Format Note
============================

   To users whose image files are resolution-sensitive, please take a
look at the issues listed below:

   1. GIF and TGA file formats do not retain resolution information.
   2. PCX old format (follow spec dated before Dec 12, 1990) keeps
      information that is not what we term "resolution".

   If you have files in the formats listed above, and if you really
   care about the resolution information, we suggest the following
   solutions:

   1. For new image files that have the resolution information you
      want, save them in other file formats.
   2. For old image files that have no (or the wrong) resolution
      information, open them, then resample to the resolution you
      want, then save them in another file format.


==================
Miscellaneous
==================

   If you have trouble using PhotoStyler in a network environment, (for
example, lacking the double dot ".." at the top of the directory list box
in the open dialog box), please refer to the file "NETWORKS.TXT in your
Windows 3.0 directory.


=======================================
Contents of the installed directory
=======================================

The target directory contains:

      PSSETUP  EXE      ; setup program
      PSSETUP  INF      ; setup information file
      README   TXT      ; this file
      PSTYLER  EXE      ; PhotoStyler application program
      PSTYLER  HLP      ; help file
      PSTYLER  INI      ; PhotoStyler private profile
      PSVERIFY EXE      ; verify program
      PSVERIFY DAT      ; verify data file

      EXPORT   EXE      ; sample import/export plug-in module
      ULSCAN   DRV      ; installed scanner driver for PhotoStyler
      ULSCAN   HLP      ; Microtek scanner operation help
      MICROTEK HLP      ; Microtek scanner operation help
      MSCAN    SYS      ; Microtek scanner driver (DOS based,
                          installed by changing the CONFIG.SYS file)
      PSLOGO   TIF      ; logo file (the content can be replaced by
                          one of your own TIFF files to customize the
                          PhotoStyler initialization screen)
      PSGAMMA  TIF      ; monitor gamma calibration file
      BIRD     TIF      ; sample color image
      CLAY     TIF      ; sample color image
      CANDY    TIF      ; sample color image

PALETTES sub-directory contains:

      ; sample ASCII based color palette definition files

      _CLRBAR  PAL      _EARTH   PAL      _EGA     PAL
      _FLASH1  PAL      _HUES1   PAL      _HUES2   PAL
      _LIGHT   PAL      _METAL1  PAL      _PASTEL  PAL
      _R2B2G2R PAL      _RAINBO1 PAL      _RAINBO2 PAL
      _RAINBO3 PAL      _RGBCMYG PAL      _RGBG    PAL
      _SEPIA   PAL      _STANDA  PAL      _STANDA1 PAL
      _STANDA2 PAL      _STANDA3 PAL      _STANDA4 PAL
      _STANDA5 PAL      _VGA     PAL      _VIVID   PAL

      ; sample image based color palettes

      7BALLS   PAL      BUTTONS  PAL      COLORPAD PAL
      SPACE    PAL


PATTERNS sub-directory contains sample fill patterns:

      ROCK     PAT      SKY      PAT      STONE1   PAT
      STONE2   PAT      STONE3   PAT      STONE4   PAT
      STONE5   PAT      STONE6   PAT      WOOD     PAT

FILTERS sub-directory contains sample user defined filters:

      AVERAGE  UDF      BLUR     UDF      EMBOSS   UDF
      SHARPEN  UDF

COLORS sub-directory contains four sub-directories:

   HUE sub-directory contains:

      HUE000   CLR      HUE010   CLR      HUE020   CLR
      HUE030   CLR      HUE040   CLR      HUE050   CLR
      HUE060   CLR      HUE070   CLR      HUE080   CLR
      HUE090   CLR      HUE100   CLR      HUE110   CLR
      HUE120   CLR      HUE130   CLR      HUE140   CLR
      HUE150   CLR      HUE160   CLR      HUE170   CLR
      HUE180   CLR      HUE190   CLR      HUE200   CLR
      HUE210   CLR      HUE220   CLR      HUE230   CLR
      HUE240   CLR      HUE250   CLR      HUE260   CLR
      HUE270   CLR      HUE280   CLR      HUE290   CLR
      HUE300   CLR      HUE310   CLR      HUE320   CLR
      HUE330   CLR      HUE340   CLR      HUE350   CLR

   RAINBOW sub-directory contains:

      CGARMB   CLR      CGYORMB  CLR      CGYORMPB CLR
      RYGBW    CLR

   SPECIAL sub-directory contains:

      COOLGRAY CLR      GOLD     CLR      GRAY     CLR
      SILVER   CLR      WARMGRAY CLR

   SPREADS sub-directory contains:

      BL-OR    CLR      BL-YL    CLR      BR-ORC   CLR
      DKGR-YL  CLR      FLESH    CLR      GR-BL    CLR
      GR-ORC   CLR      GR-YL    CLR      LTBLLTGR CLR
      LTGR-YL  CLR      OR-PR    CLR      OR-RD    CLR
      OR-YL    CLR      PK-GR    CLR      PK-YL    CLR
      PR-BL    CLR      PR-PK    CLR      PR-YL    CLR
      RD-BL    CLR      RD-GR    CLR      RD-YL    CLR
017 中文 Photo Styler V2.0 5×TD 180元
README.TX_ [展开]
File List:

PSTYLER  EXE  -- copy to TARGET directory
U3DUI    DLL  -- copy to TARGET directory
PSSTR    DLL  -- copy to TARGET directory
UBROWSER DLL  -- copy to TARGET directory
UF2LZW   DLL  -- copy to TARGET directory
EXPORT   EXE  -- copy to TARGET directory
RAWIMAGE EXE  -- copy to TARGET directory
UF2TIF   FIO  -- copy to TARGET\PLUG_IN2
UF2PCD   FIO  -- copy to TARGET\PLUG_IN2
UF2PSD   FIO  -- copy to TARGET\PLUG_IN2
UF2EPS   FIO  -- copy to TARGET\PLUG_IN2
UF2TGA   FIO  -- copy to TARGET\PLUG_IN2
PCDLIB   DLL  -- copy to TARGET\PLUG_IN2 AND TARGET\PLUG_IN
ALBUM    EXE  -- copy to TARGET directory

total: 14 files sent
018 Aldus Photo Styler V1.1A 3×HD
README.TXT [展开]
********************************************************************
Aldus PhotoStyler Version 1.1a   README.TXT   April, 1992
********************************************************************

This file contains the following topics:

   - Features included in PhotoStyler 1.1a
   - Installing compressed files
   - Installing the Sharp or Nikon scanner driver
   - Installing with the Mona Lisa display card
   - Network operation
   - Updating PhotoStyler
   - File formats -- Resolution
   - File formats -- EPS for Macintosh
   - Mask limitation
   - Plug-in filters
   - Setting page size for printing from a PostScript dump
   - Separating PhotoStyler images through Aldus PrePrint
   - Running STACKER with PhotoStyler
   - Printing error under Windows 3.1


***********************************************************


=======================================
Features included in PhotoStyler 1.1a
=======================================

Aldus PhotoStyler 1.1a incorporates a number of feature enhancements,
a JPEG image compression module, a raw data format module,
updated Epson and Nikon scanner drivers, and an updated Kodak export 
module.

- Additional TARGA data type
  PhotoStyler can now open and save greyscale images in the TARGA format.

- Printer marks
  The new "Include printer marks" checkbox in the "Page Setup" dialogue box
  causes PhotoStyler to print crop marks, registration marks, a 
  calibration bar, and (for colour images) a colour bar along with
  the image. This new checkbox takes the place of the old "Include 
  crop marks" and "Include calibration bar" checkboxes.

- Improved performance
  Performance has been improved in several areas, most notably 
  cutting, copying, and pasting via the Clipboards, operation of 
  painting tools, and display of images onscreen. In addition, 
  the speed of opening and saving images using LZW compression 
  has been greatly improved.

- Opening files
  Several enhancements make it easier and faster to open files in 
  PhotoStyler 1.1a:
	
	- PhotoStyler now lists the most recently opened filenames 
	  at the bottom of the File menu for faster access. To open 
	  a file directly from the File menu, click its filename. 
 	  Note that you can open only a single file at a time by 
	  this method.

	- You can now open multiple files in one operation. In the 
          "Open Image File" dialogue box, select a group of filenames
  	  by clicking the top name, then holding down the Shift key 
	  and clicking the bottom name. Or select discontiguous 
	  filenames by holding down the Ctrl key as you click. 
	  Alternatively, you can type the names of the files you 
	  want to open, separating each name by a space. Click "OK" 
	  to open all selected files. To cancel the opening of
	  all remaining selected files, hold down Shift and press 
	  the Esc key.

	- The new "All formats" file extension option in the "Open 
          Image File" dialogue box lets you choose from a list of all
	  PhotoStyler-compatible files, regardless of file type.

- Closing files
  New shortcuts enable you in a single operation to close all open 
  images without saving or to exit from PhotoStyler without saving 
  open images.

	- To close all open images without saving, hold down the 
	  Shift key and choose "Close" from the File menu.

	- To exit from PhotoStyler without saving multiple open 
	  images, hold down the Shift key and choose "Exit" from 
	  the File menu. Alternatively, you can hold down the Shift 
	  key and double-click the control menu box at the upper 
	  left corner of the PhotoStyler application window.

- Context-sensitive online help available for dialogue boxes
  You can now display context-sensitive online help for a dialogue box
  by pressing the F1 key when the dialogue box is open.

- Updated scanner driver
  The updated Epson scanner driver now supports use of the Epson
  scanners with IBM PS/2 computers.

- Updated Kodak export module
  The Kodak export module has been updated to support the Kodak 
  XLT7720 printer. 
	
- JPEG image compression
  JPEG is a standard method of compressing continuous-tone images 
  while saving them, resulting in a smaller file size. Photo-
  Styler 1.1a enables you to save a Greyscale or RGB True Colour
  image in a compressed form on disk, then decompress the image 
  when you want to work on it. For detailed online information 
  about the JPEG import/export module, highlight the JPEG 
  compression command on either the "Import" or "Export" 
  submenu on the File menu, then press the F1 key.

- Raw format images
  Some types of medical imaging and other scientific equipment 
  (such as Magnetic Resonance Imaging machines, scanning laser 
  microscopes, x-ray machines, and LANDSAT satellites) can create 
  images in the form of raw binary data. PhotoStyler 1.1a provides 
  an import/export module that enables you to open non-interlaced 
  raw image files in PhotoStyler if you know some information about 
  the file, such as the image height and width in pixels, whether 
  the image file has a header, etc. You can also export images 
  from PhotoStyler 1.1a in the form of a raw data file for use in 
  other applications that do not support standard file formats. The 
  "Raw Format Image..." commands appear on the "Import" and "Export"
  submenus on the File menu only if you have installed the Raw Image 
  Data Format import/export module (RAWIMAGE.EXE). For detailed 
  online information about the raw data format, press the F1 key 
  while the "Raw Format Image..." command is highlighted.



=======================================
Installing compressed files
=======================================

Your Aldus PhotoStyler disk set contains files that have been 
compressed to save disk space. These files contain the tilde (~) 
character as part of their filename extension. These files are 
automatically decompressed by the PhotoStyler installation program, 
at which point they are automatically renamed to their standard 
filename.


=======================================
Installing the Sharp or Nikon scanner driver
=======================================

If you choose to install either the Sharp or the Nikon scanner 
driver BEFORE you have installed the required General Purpose 
Interface Bus (GPIB) board and its associated software, you will 
receive an error message stating "Cannot find GPIB.DLL" each time 
you start PhotoStyler. Click the "OK" button to continue. The 
absence of the GPIB file will not prevent you from using PhotoStyler,
however, you will not be able to use the scanner until you have 
installed the scanner, the GPIB board, and the GPIB software. Once 
these are successfully installed, the error message will no longer 
appear.

Note: The Nikon scanner driver shipped with PhotoStyler 1.1a
supports the Nikon LS3500 scanner. If you need the scanner driver
for the Nikon LS3510 scanner, contact the dealer where you
bought your Nikon product. If they cannot help you, contact Nikon's
technical support line at Nikon headquarters in New York, at
1-516-547-4358.


=============================
Installing with the Mona Lisa display card
=============================

To install Aldus PhotoStyler on a system that uses a Mona Lisa
display card, you must have a Mona Lisa driver version 1.05
(or higher). If you don't have the appropriate driver, change
the display setting in Windows Setup to VGA before you run 
"pssetup.exe." When the installation is complete, switch the
display setting back to the Mona Lisa driver.


=====================================================
Network operation
=====================================================

If you have trouble using PhotoStyler in a network environment,
(for example, if the double dot ".." does not appear at the top of
the directory list box in the "Open" dialogue box), please refer to
the file "NETWORKS.TXT" in your Windows 3.0 directory.


=======================================
Updating PhotoStyler
=======================================

If you want to update part, but not all, of PhotoStyler (for 
example, to change to a different scanner driver), run PSSETUP.EXE 
and select the "Update" option. You must correctly enter the path 
to the PhotoStyler directory. When you have completed updating the 
selected file(s), click "Exit" to return to the program manager.



============================
File Formats -- Resolution
============================

Files saved from some applications that use the old .PCX format 
(that follow specifications dated before Dec 12, 1990) are saved 
with a different type of "resolution" information. In addition, 
the GIF and TGA file formats do not retain resolution information. 
If you have files that were saved in one of these formats, and the 
resolution of the file is important to you, open the file in Aldus 
PhotoStyler, resample to the resolution you want, then save in 
another file format.


=======================================
File Formats -- EPS files for Macintosh
=======================================

If you choose to save your file in the Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) 
format, PhotoStyler gives you the choice of ASCII or Binary. If you 
intend to use your EPS file in a Macintosh application, we recommend 
that you choose the "ASCII" option, and save the file without a 
preview image.


======================
Mask limitation
======================

[For additional information, refer to pages 148 through 152 in the 
Aldus PhotoStyler User Manual.]
To be used as a mask, an image must contain at least one pixel with 
a greyscale value of 128 or greater. If the image that you attempt
to use as a mask does NOT contain any greysale values in the
permissible range, PhotoStyler will display an error message 
informing you that the operation cannot be done.


=========================
Plug-in filters
=========================

A maximum of 60 plug-in filters can be used with PhotoStyler.



=====================================================
Setting page size for printing from a PostScript dump
=====================================================

If you experience difficulty in printing a PostScript dump file 
to the proper page size (for example, in printing the PostScript 
file to an imagesetter), follow these steps AFTER you have created 
your file:

1. Select "Printer Setup..." from the File menu.
2. In the "Printer Setup" dialogue box, click the "Setup..." button.
3. In the printer-specific dialogue box, choose options for
"Printer," "Paper Size," etc.
4. Click the "Options..." button.
5. In the "Options" dialogue box, click the "Header..." button.
6. In the "Header" dialogue box, select "Printer."
7. Click "OK" to close each dialogue box.
8. If you need crop marks or calibration bars, choose "Page 
Setup..." from the File menu, then make the appropriate selections.
9. Select "Print..." from the file menu and print the file.


=====================================================
Separating PhotoStyler images through Aldus PrePrint
=====================================================

If you have trouble separating an Aldus PageMaker publication
that contains PhotoStyler TIFF images through Aldus PrePrint 
1.5, open the TIFF image(s) in PrePrint before you separate 
the publication. Leave the image window(s) open while you 
print separations of the publication.


=====================================================
Running STACKER with PhotoStyler
=====================================================

The following are steps you can take to avoid possible
problems with PhotoStyler if you are using the disk-
compression utility STACKER:  

1. Swap files
   When setting up STACKER, you can leave disk space
   uncompressed for storing of system files. If you will
   be using a swap file, it must be set up on the 
   uncompressed drive. To work with an image, PhotoStyler
   requires a swap file space at least double the size of
   the image itself. If you get "Disk full" error messages
   even when your compressed drive indicates that there 
   is sufficient room for the active file, check that your
   permanent swap file (or the uncompressed drive containing
   your temporary swap file) is large enough to hold twice
   the image size.

2. CONFIG.SYS
   During STACKER installation, a SSWAP line may have been 
   added to your CONFIG.SYS file to substitute the drive 
   letter of your physical hard drive for the letter of
   STACKER's logical drive. If this is the case, any lines
   added for PhotoStyler-related devices must come after
   the SSWAP line. If you install certain PhotoStyler drivers 
   that require additions to your CONFIG.SYS file, you will
   be alerted to that fact by the PSSETUP installation program,
   which will give you the option of updating CONFIG.SYS 
   automatically or updating the file yourself after the 
   installation is complete. Whether you allow PSSETUP to 
   automatically update your CONFIG.SYS file, or you make
   the modification yourself, you should check to make sure
   that the added device line(s) are positioned after the
   STACKER-related SSWAP line.


=====================================================
Printing error under Windows 3.1
=====================================================

Microsoft has fixed a problem existing in the universal
printer driver shipped with Windows 3.1. This problem 
caused a "General Application Error" (GAE) when printing 
from PhotoStyler to some printers that use the universal 
printer driver (such as the Hewlett-Packard PaintJet). 
The error will occur with this printer driver if the 
"Halftone by Printer" option is selected in PhotoStyler's 
"Page Setup" dialogue box. The fixed version of Microsoft's
Windows 3.1 universal driver is available on the WDL 
(Windows Driver Library) disk available on CompuServe
or from Microsoft.

=====================================================
019 BOY WINDOWS V1.10 4×HD 100元
INSTALL.TXT
    BoyWindows V1.1 基础版于1994年4月
正式推出. 其功能相当于其正式版本的子集.
    于正式版本相比, 基础版的标准窗口部
件数较少, 只有13种. 另外, 每种部件的数
量也被限定在3种以下.
    本系统大约占5兆左右的硬盘空间.
020 Aldus Photo Styler V2.00 5×TD
README.TXT
This file is intentionally left blank.
021 Aldus Photo Styler V2.00 6×TD 100元
高级图象处理,可处理24位图象,支持PCX,TIF ,EPS,BMP,GIF格式可做尺寸变换,柔化,锐化,移动,边界增强,浮雕效果,形变等处理具有电子分色及有分色版成象等功能
022 EZsofe Photo Finish V2.00 2×TD 100元
高级图象处理,可处理24位图象,支持多种格式,速度快,功能强
023 PHOTO FINISH V2.0 3×HD
024 PHOTO FINISH V3.0 2×HD
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.DDI 2.DDI
025 KODAK PHOTOEDGE V1.0 2×HD
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.DDI 2.DDI
026 Matinee For windows 3×HD
027 Print Shop V1.00 1×HD
028 Photo stacker V1.00 1×TD 100元
图象文件压缩工具
README.TXT [展开]
                         PhotoStacker Version 1.03
                       =============================

Thank you for purchasing PhotoStacker. This readme file contains
informations that have not been fully documented elsewhere.
Close Notepad to return to Program Manager if you don't want
to read this file.

1. Install PhotoStacker:
========================

PhotoStacker's setup program will automatically install PhotoStacker
for you. You should only start Microsoft Windows and run SETUP.EXE
from Program Manager or File Manager. After installation, a program
group titled PhotoStacker and a program icon titled PhotoStacker
will appear in the Program Manager. Double click in the PhotoStacker
program icon will start PhotoStacker.


2. Disk Contents:
=================

README.TXT          PhotoStacker Information File (This file you're reading)

SETUP.EXE           PhotoStacker Setup Program (Windows application)
SETUP.INF           PhotoStacker Setup Information File
SETUP.DLL           Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker Setup
METERX.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker Setup
LZEXPAND.DLL        Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker Setup

PSTACKER.EXE        PhotoStacker Execution File
PSTACKER.INI        PhotoStacker Initialization File
PSTACKER.HLP        PhotoStacker On-Line Help
DSPMONO.DLL         Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
DSP16.DLL           Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
DSP256.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
DSP16M.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
FORMAT.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
MMSLIB.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
MSG.DLL             Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker

PSLOGO.TIF          PhotoStacker Logo Image File
SAMPLE.TIF          Sample Image File

QTTABLE\LUMIN.QT    Quantization Table
QTTABLE\CHROM.QT    Quantization Table

BNDTABLE\DEFAULT.BT Band Selection Table

Most of these files have been compressed. They are automatically
decompressed when you run SETUP.EXE to install PhotoStacker.


3.Capture Image From TWAIN Data Source:
=======================================

PhotoStacker is a TWAIN-compliant host application. It can capture image
from any TWAIN-compliant Data Source. There are two commands involved:
Acquire command and Select Source command that are in the File menu.

If there is more than one Data Source available in your system, choose
"Select Source" command to select a specific Data Source. Choose "Acquire"
command to bring up the selected Data Source.

Before using a TWAIN Data Source, you must first install it.
Please refer to your TWAIN Data Source (e.g. Artec TWAIN Source)
User's Guide to install it.


4. Memory Requirement:
======================

PhotoStacker will use disk drives as virtual memory if there is not enough
DRAM memory. But it will slow down the performance of PhotoStacker. We
recommend that you expand your DRAM memory twice as large as the size
of image that is to be compressed. For example: if you want to compress
a 2 MBytes image with PhotoStacker, you should have at least 4 MBytes
DRAM memory to get high performance.

ULTIMA ELECTRONICS CORP.
3358 GATEWAY BLVD
FREMONT CA 94358
U.S.A.
TEL: 1-510-659-1580
FAX: 1-510-440-1217


9F, NO. 18, ALLEY 1, LANE 768, SEC 4
PA TE ROAD, TAIPEI
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: 886-2-788-5470
FAX: 886-2-788-5657


WORKSHOP NO. 24 ON 10/F
PACIFIC TRADE CENTRE
2 KAI HING ROAD
KOWLOON BAY, KOWLOON
HONG KONG
TEL: 852-757-8059
     852-757-8072
FAX: 852-753-7795
029 PHOTOSTACKER FOR WINDOWS 1×HD
README.TXT [展开]
                         PhotoStacker Version 1.03
                       =============================

Thank you for purchasing PhotoStacker. This readme file contains
informations that have not been fully documented elsewhere.
Close Notepad to return to Program Manager if you don't want
to read this file.

1. Install PhotoStacker:
========================

PhotoStacker's setup program will automatically install PhotoStacker
for you. You should only start Microsoft Windows and run SETUP.EXE
from Program Manager or File Manager. After installation, a program
group titled PhotoStacker and a program icon titled PhotoStacker
will appear in the Program Manager. Double click in the PhotoStacker
program icon will start PhotoStacker.


2. Disk Contents:
=================

README.TXT          PhotoStacker Information File (This file you're reading)

SETUP.EXE           PhotoStacker Setup Program (Windows application)
SETUP.INF           PhotoStacker Setup Information File
SETUP.DLL           Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker Setup
METERX.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker Setup
LZEXPAND.DLL        Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker Setup

PSTACKER.EXE        PhotoStacker Execution File
PSTACKER.INI        PhotoStacker Initialization File
PSTACKER.HLP        PhotoStacker On-Line Help
DSPMONO.DLL         Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
DSP16.DLL           Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
DSP256.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
DSP16M.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
FORMAT.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
MMSLIB.DLL          Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker
MSG.DLL             Dynamic Link Library used by PhotoStacker

PSLOGO.TIF          PhotoStacker Logo Image File
SAMPLE.TIF          Sample Image File

QTTABLE\LUMIN.QT    Quantization Table
QTTABLE\CHROM.QT    Quantization Table

BNDTABLE\DEFAULT.BT Band Selection Table

Most of these files have been compressed. They are automatically
decompressed when you run SETUP.EXE to install PhotoStacker.


3.Capture Image From TWAIN Data Source:
=======================================

PhotoStacker is a TWAIN-compliant host application. It can capture image
from any TWAIN-compliant Data Source. There are two commands involved:
Acquire command and Select Source command that are in the File menu.

If there is more than one Data Source available in your system, choose
"Select Source" command to select a specific Data Source. Choose "Acquire"
command to bring up the selected Data Source.

Before using a TWAIN Data Source, you must first install it.
Please refer to your TWAIN Data Source (e.g. Artec TWAIN Source)
User's Guide to install it.


4. Memory Requirement:
======================

PhotoStacker will use disk drives as virtual memory if there is not enough
DRAM memory. But it will slow down the performance of PhotoStacker. We
recommend that you expand your DRAM memory twice as large as the size
of image that is to be compressed. For example: if you want to compress
a 2 MBytes image with PhotoStacker, you should have at least 4 MBytes
DRAM memory to get high performance.

ULTIMA ELECTRONICS CORP.
3358 GATEWAY BLVD
FREMONT CA 94358
U.S.A.
TEL: 1-510-659-1580
FAX: 1-510-440-1217


9F, NO. 18, ALLEY 1, LANE 768, SEC 4
PA TE ROAD, TAIPEI
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: 886-2-788-5470
FAX: 886-2-788-5657


WORKSHOP NO. 24 ON 10/F
PACIFIC TRADE CENTRE
2 KAI HING ROAD
KOWLOON BAY, KOWLOON
HONG KONG
TEL: 852-757-8059
     852-757-8072
FAX: 852-753-7795
030 IPHOTO PLUS FOR WINDOWS 1×HD
README.TXT [展开]
           Addendum for Twain for Windows Scan Module User Guide 
           =====================================================

Version 1.1 release notice
==========================

This release provides Scaling Calculator capability.

The Scaling Calculator Command
 
The Scaling Calculator makes it easy to calculate the scaling percentage 
required to make the scanned image fit a certain size area. With the Scaling 
Calculator, you can set the final scanned image to just the output 
dimensions you need.

To open the Scaling Calculator, click on the Scaling Calculator button to the 
right of the Scaling slider control. The Scaling Calculator box appears.

The top half of the dialog box shows the Height and Width of the current 
image. The current image is the area outlined by the scanning frame when the 
dialog box is opened. The Scaling value shown is the current Scaling 
setting, and the Size is the size of the image file.

The botton half of the dialog box shows the dimensions of the image after 
changes in scaling are made. The Height, Width, Size and Scaling text boxes 
can be set to any value by highlighting the current value and entering a new 
one. The other values are updated automatically to match the new value.

You can enter new values in the Scaling text box until you find the value 
you want, or you can enter a new dimension value in the Height or Width text 
box and use the new Scaling value supplied by the calculator.

Note: The relationship of the With and Height does not change when using the 
Scaling Calculator. If you want to change only the Width or Hieght, you need 
to redraw the scanning frame to a new shape.

The unit of measurement for the dimensions can be set to inches, pixels, 
centimeters or millimeters. Set the unit with the list box in the Image 
Status Controls.

OK        To accept the values entered in the text boxes, click on the OK 
          button. The value of the scaling control is automatically updated.

Cancel    To cancel the changes, click the Cancel button.

Version 1.2 release notice 
==========================

This release implements internal ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) commands to 
ScanMaker II and ScanMaker IIxe.

Some leading software programs have been tested and confirmed functionally
well. Program names are listed below.


                 Application          Version        Supplier
          ======================    ============   =============
           Omnipage Professional                     Caere 

                PhotoFinish             1.0          Zsoft

                  WinRix                1.1          Rix Softworks


Version 1.3 release notice
==========================

From this release, effects of Filter, Mirror and Invert can be seen in 
the Scanner Display window while performing the Prescan command. Notices 
concerning inconveniencies appeared in the manual on pages 30 and 31 are 
lifted. 
 
Implements the Scan Material command for ScanMaker 35t and ScanMaker 45t.
This command is valid to ScanMaker II series scanners if the scanner is 
harnessed with Microtek's Transparent Media Adapter.

The Scan Material command

The Scan Material command allows you to scan in the slide (positive film) or 
the negative film. 

To choose the type of scan material, click on the Scan Material button aside 
the Scan Mode selection. The Scan Material dialog box appears.

Click to make your selection for the slide (the upper one), or the negative 
film (the lower one). Click OK as acceptance, or Cancel to abandon the 
choices you have made. Appearance of the Scan Material button displays your 
most recent selection.

Note: The Scan Material option is only available for the latest Microtek 
scanner models including ScanMaker 35t Slide Scanner and ScanMaker 45t 
Multiformat Film Scanner. For ScanMaker II series scanners, a transparent 
media adapter is required to enable this function. Operating ScanMaker II or 
ScanMaker IIxe with the transparent media adapter mounted, you have three 
scan material choices: the reflective document, the slide, and the negative
film. 


              Using the ScanMaker II with non-Twain applications
              ==================================================

The ScanMaker II for the PC comes with Scan Module, software that
allows the scanner to be used with Twain compliant applications.
You can also use the scanner with applications that are not yet
Twain compliant, such as Picture Publisher and WordScan, by
following these steps.

Non Twain-compliant applications require a file called MSCAN.SYS
to be copied onto the hard drive and then added to the CONFIG.SYS
file. However, the newer ScanMaker II scanners cannot but used
with the MSCAN.SYS driver. To use the ScanMaker II, you must use
the software driver called MSCSI.SYS, and then get the
application to work with that software driver. Please run INSTSYS.EXE
in the floppy disk to install MSCSI.SYS or follow the following instruction.

Part 1

The first step is to copy the file MSCSI.SYS to your hard drive.
Copy the file to the hard drive's main directory. If your hard
drive is Drive C, and your floppy is Drive A, then place your
floppy disk in the drive and enter:

COPY A:\MSCSI.SYS C:\

Once the file is in the root directory, add it to the CONFIG.SYS
file. To add the new line to the CONFIG.SYS file, you can use any
text editor such as EDLIN in DOS, or you can use the Windows
Notepad application. The new line should look like this:

device = MSCSI.SYS

After adding the line to CONFIG.SYS, reboot your computer.



Part 2

The ScanMaker II for the PC comes with Scan Module, software that
allows the scanner to be used with Twain compliant applications.
ScanMaker II scanners use a software driver called MSCSI.SYS.
Here is how to use the MSCSI.SYS driver with applications that
are not Twain compliant, and are expecting the MSCAN.SYS driver.
The MSCSI.SYS driver is fully backward compatible with the
MSCAN.SYS driver. However, the techniques used for setting the
address with MSCAN.SYS and MSCSI.SYS are different; MSCAN.SYS
uses I/O port addresses, such as 200 and 300, while MSCSI.SYS
uses memory address, like d400 and d000.  In addition, MSCSI.SYS
requires the SCSI ID number information.
When asked to enter the I/O port address, enter a code number
that represents the SCSI ID and memory address. For example, if
your ScanMaker II SCSI ID setting is at 6 and the interface card
address is set at dc00, you can find the correct address code in
the following table. Just find where the correct SCSI ID column
intersects with the row containing the interface card address. In
this example, the correct code is 60.
With some applications, you may be required to use a 3 digit
number for the I/O address, while the number codes in the table
below are only 2 digits. If this happens, simply put a "2" or "3"
at the beginning of the code number. So in the above example, the
"60" would become "260." The extra number at the beginning has no
effect on the code. It is used only to fool the application.


 Interface                 Scanner SCSI ID Number
    Card
      Addres    0      1      2      3       4      5      6
        s
      0xd400   06      05     04     03     02      01     00
      0xd000   16      15     14     13     12      11     10
      0xcc00   26      25     24     23     22      21     20
      0xc800   36      35     34     33     32      31     30
      0xe400   46      45     44     43     42      41     40
      0xe000   56      55     54     53     52      51     50
      0xdc00   66      65     64     63     62      61     60
      0xd800   76      75     74     73     72      71     70
         Table 1. The Address and SCSI ID Mapping Table




Part 3

After you have set up the scanner, you are ready to use the
ScanMaker II. If the application gives you the option of
selecting the ScanMaker II, then choose ScanMaker II. If the
ScanMaker II is not directly supported, you can choose a
different scanner model, such as the 600Z or the 300Z.

In the case of Picture Publisher, you should select "600Z." If
you are using WordScan, then choose "Microtek scanners (all)."

Once you have selected your scanner, you will be able to use it
inside the application.
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.DDI
031 ISDS/DRAW R1.1 FOR WINDOWS 2×HD
032 JPEG WORKSHOP FOR WINDOWS 1×HD
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.DDI
033 JUSTWRITE FOR WINDOWS 3×HD
034 JPEG 1×TD 150元
图象文件压缩工具
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.IMG
035 迪斯尼 3×TD
036 AUTO Sketch V3.0 8×HD
README.DOC [展开]
AutoSketch Version 3 Readme.doc
Part Number: SK3RD-1  
18 September 1990


                        Table of Contents

Installation and Performance Guide Corrections/Additions      1

     How To Optimize Performance                              1
     Installing AutoSketch                                    1
     Sketch3.bat file                                         1
     Hewlett-Packard (HP) LaserJet and LaserJet Plus          1
     IBM EGA Display with Monochrome Monitor                  2
     PostScript                                               2
     Summagraphics SummaSketch MM Series Tablet               2

The AutoSketch Reference Manual                               2

     Attach Modes - Perpendicular and Tangent                 2
     Boxes                                                    2
     Breaking Closed Polylines                                2
     Editing Text in Dialogue Boxes                           3  
     File Naming Conventions                                  3
     Groups                                                   3
     Macros - How to Avoid Display Dependency                 4
     Read DXF and Pattern Fills                               4
     Text Editor                                              4

     Appendix E - Additional Error Messages                   5 

The AutoSketch Tutorial                                       5

Drawing to Scale and Plotting                                 6

     Setting Up a Drawing to Scale                            6
     Dimensioning                                             7
     Plotting or Printing the Drawing to Scale                7
     Plotting or Printing the Drawing to Fit the Paper        7

Autodesk Device Interface (ADI) & Terminate-and-Stay-Resident 8
(TSR) Drivers












(page i)                                 Part no. SK3RD-1 


       Installation and Performance Guide Corrections/Additions

                How To Optimize Performance

AutoSketch Version 3 allows the creation of drawings much larger
than previous versions of AutoSketch. In fact, on a machine without 
extended/expanded memory, AutoSketch Version 3 can create drawings 
twice as large as in AutoSketch Version 2. 

As AutoSketch Version 3 drawings (created without extended/expanded 
memory) grow beyond the maximum size of AutoSketch Version 2 
drawings, editing command response time starts to degrade. This is 
due to increased hard disk access because of the limited memory
available to AutoSketch.

Adding extended/expanded memory to your computer is the best way to 
improve editing response time in these larger drawings.  Refer to 
"Chapter 4 - Performance" in the AutoSketch Installation and 
Performance Guide for more information on optimum configuration.

                   Installing AutoSketch

To install AutoSketch Version 3 place Disk 1 in your floppy disk
drive and type:

          [drive letter]: <return>

after you have switched to the floppy drive type: 

          install

Important:  Don't copy the AutoSketch diskettes to your hard disk
prior to installation.  AutoSketch will not work if you just copy
the files to your hard disk because some of the files are
compressed.  The Install routine decompresses the files for you. 
If you have copied the diskettes, delete the files Install.exe and
Install.dat from your hard disk and then follow the instructions
outlined above.  For additional information please refer to the
AutoSketch Installation and Performance Guide.

                        Sketch3.bat file

If you choose to have the AutoSketch Install program create the
file sketch3.bat, note that this file is created in the C drive
root directory.  If DOS can't find this file when you type Sketch3,
check your DOS path statement to be sure that it includes `C:\'. 
See page 24 of the AutoSketch Installation and Performance Guide
for further information.
                                
       Hewlett-Packard (HP) LaserJet and LaserJet Plus

Page 69: HP LaserJet and LaserJet Plus printers; maximum X paper
sizes should read 7.99" not 7.28".
(page 1)                                     Part no. SK3RD-1

             IBM EGA Display with Monochrome Monitor

If you have an Enhanced Graphics Adapter (EGA) board installed and
are using a Monochrome Monitor, you will need to choose item 4, CGA
(monochrome mode), when you configure for your display.

                           PostScript

The AutoSketch PostScript driver was written to support 300 dots
per inch (dpi) resolution.  The internal linewidth is set to .01
which we found to be satisfactory for most applications.  The
PostScript file can be edited.  Please check your PostScript manual
for further details.

Page 78: Serial Port Setup Diagram should list the handshaking as
XON/XOFF, not Hardware.

           Summagraphics SummaSketch MM Series Tablet

The section "Summagraphics SummmaSketch MM Series Tablets (in mouse
mode)" refers to the model 1201 only.

*****************************************************************
                The AutoSketch Reference Manual  

            Attach Modes - Perpendicular and Tangent

The section "Attach Types" in The AutoSketch Reference Manual
should read:

Remember that you can select or change attach modes while in the
middle of a drawing or change operation with the exception of
Tangent and Perpendicular attach modes.

Tangent and Perpendicular attach modes require selection of two
points to work.
                          Boxes

Any box created by AutoSketch versions prior to AutoSketch Version
3 will be treated as a polyline when brought into Version 3.  Boxes
created in earlier AutoSketch versions can take on properties of
polylines, such as width.  

                 Breaking Closed Polylines

If you Break a `closed' polyline (a polyline that has the same
start and end point) and you aren't satisfied with the results,
just Undo the break and reverse the order of the points selected. 
The section "Break - Closed Objects" in The AutoSketch Reference
Manual illustrates various closed entities before and after
breaking.  To get results identical to those in the manual you may
need to Undo and re-select your break points in reverse order.


(page 2)                                     Part no. SK3RD-1



                 Editing Text in Dialogue Boxes

To edit text in dialogue boxes, you can use a combination of mouse
or keyboard input.  To edit text, click with the mouse and then
press the right or left arrow key to position the cursor.  To
delete text, press Delete or Backspace.  Click on the Cancel box to
cancel, or click on the OK box to accept the changes.

To replace an entire line of text, position the pointer over the
text (which becomes highlighted) and type the new text without
first clicking within the text.  The new text will replace the
previous text.  If you click or press the left or right arrow key,
Backspace or Delete, the existing text remains and the cursor is
positioned within the text.  Remember that pressing Return selects
the OK button and pressing Escape selects the Cancel button.

                  File Naming Conventions

When AutoSketch asks for a file name, you should enter just the
name, without a period or extension, unless a particular command
description states otherwise.  AutoSketch adds the appropriate
extension for the task at hand.  AutoSketch file names may include
only letters, digits, and the special characters "$" (dollar), "-"
(hyphen), and "_" (underscore).  The following are valid AutoSketch
file names.

     office    803       pcb_7788       $-zonk-$

The following are improper file names for AutoSketch.

#1234     (invalid character)
any.old   (don't specify an extension)

Note: If you would like certain file names to appear before others
in directory listings just begin the file name with a number. 
AutoSketch sorts by number first and then by letter.

                           Groups 

The section entitled "Objects You Can Stretch" should read:
Groups (if one or more control points are selected for each and
every object in the group using a crosses/window box.  In this
case those individual objects in the group which can be
stretched, such as polylines, will be stretched, and those
objects which cannot be stretched, such as circles, will be
moved.  Any object which is completely enclosed by a
crosses/window box will be moved, not stretched.)

The section entitled "You cannot stretch these objects" should
read: Groups (if you try to stretch the group by completely
enclosing all objects within a crosses/window box.  In this case
the entire group will be moved without individual objects being
stretched.) 
(page 3)                                     Part no. SK3RD-1


           Macros - How to Avoid Display Dependency

Macros may be "display dependent".  Creating a macro on one type of
display, such as a VGA, and then playing it on another display,
such as a Hercules InColor, may result in the macro stopping during
playback.  The location of the scroll bars in dialogue boxes varies
between displays.  

If you will be playing a macro on various display devices, record
the selection of font, pattern or file names by clicking on the
icon or by typing in the name of the font, pattern or file.

                   Read DXF and Pattern Fills

AutoSketch produced DXF files containing Pattern Fills will be
truncated by the `Read DXF' option if they are too large.  This may
happen because AutoSketch Make DXF converts Pattern Fills to lines.
Note: Turning Fill - off before making a DXF file will reduce the
size of the DXF file and may keep the file from being truncated.
Refer to "Fill (Assist Menu)" in The AutoSketch Reference Manual
for information on how to toggle the Fill command off.

                           Text Editor

Any leading carriage returns used in the Text Editor are removed
when exiting the editor and saving text.

The Text Editor draws the text proportionally if you select a
proportionally spaced font.  If you would like your text to line up
when drawing charts or tables, use MONOTEXT, a non-proportional
font.  
                                 
Text Settings, when called from within the Text Editor, reflect
only the settings for the text currently being edited and will
not effect any other text entities.  This should not be confused
with the text settings dialogue available from the Settings
pulldown which changes Text Settings on a global level.
















(page 4)                                     Part no. SK3RD-1


            Appendix E - Additional Error Messages

"Cannot chamfer this polyline further. This chamfer will produce a
polyline with more than 200 vertices."
"Cannot fillet this polyline further. This fillet will produce a
polyline with more than 200 vertices."

     A check is made against the maximum allowable number of
     polyline or pattern fill vertices during fillet/chamfer.  If
     the count is greater than 200 the above message is displayed.

"The number of files in your directory has exceeded the maximum
allowable."

     If the directory in use has more than 575 files this error
     message will be displayed.  

"These break points produce a polyline with more than 200 vertices.
Please select different break points."

     This alert message occurs if you try to break a 200 vertice
     closed polyline with both break points on the same segment.

"This DXF file contains objects which AutoSketch cannot read in."

     The DXF file you read in does not contain any valid entities
     or the file is empty. (A blank screen is displayed).

"This DXF file is missing the ENDBLK statement of a BLOCK:ENDBLK
pair. Read DXF cannot continue."

     The DXF file contains an unbalanced (missing an ENDBLK
     statement) BLOCK section.  The Read DXF is aborted.

"This DXF file contains Blocks with negative or unequal X and Y
scale factors.  AutoSketch will ignore these Blocks."

     AutoSketch cannot handle DXF file BLOCKS with unequal or
     negative scale values. 
*****************************************************************

                 The AutoSketch Tutorial

The illustration at the bottom of page 75 shows incorrect
dimensions for the distance from the center of the mounting hole to
the intersection of the vertical center line at the top of the
mounting plate.  It displays these dimensions as 1.500 and 1.500
respectively when they should read 1.125 and 1.125.  The
illustration at the top of page 75 displays the correct dimensions.





(page 5)                                     Part no. SK3RD-1


*****************************************************************
                  Drawing to Scale and Plotting

The following exercise may help in learning how to set up and plot
a drawing "to scale".  

                 Setting Up a Drawing to Scale 

For this example we will set up a drawing of 165' X 60', (or
165 X 60 in decimal units).

1.   Start AutoSketch.
2.   Select Units from the Settings menu.
     (If you want to use decimal units, this step and step 3 are
     not necessary.)   
     Select Architectural, and pick OK to close the dialogue box.
3.   Select Limits from the Settings menu.
4.   Adjust the limits to Right 165', Top 60' (if you are working
     in decimal units, Right 165, Top 60).
5.   Pick OK to accept these values.
6.   Select Grid from the Settings Menu.
7.   An appropriate spacing for this drawing might be one grid dot
     displayed every five feet.  Enter 5'or (5) for the X Spacing
     (Y Spacing defaults to the new X Spacing value).  Select Grid
     On and OK from the dialogue box.
8.   Select Zoom Limits from the View menu.  You now have a drawing
     area set up in the type of units you have chosen, and which
     encompasses an area 165' X 60' or (165 x 60).

     Note: We have deliberately made the area larger than the
     drawing we are going to create, so you can view the drawing
     more easily.

10.  To draw a rectangle 150' X 50' or (150 x 50), select Box from
     the Draw menu and enter the following coordinates in the
     command line:
          
          First point:  0,0
          Second point: 150',50' or (150,50)
     The box will measure 150' X 50' or (150,50). 

For more information refer to: "Limits (Settings Menu) and Units
(Settings Menu)" in the AutoSketch Reference Manual.











(page 6)                                     Part no. SK3RD-1


                       Dimensioning  

Using the drawing created above, follow these steps:

1.   Use the Settings Menu to turn Attach Endpoint On and make sure
     Snap is OFF in the Assist menu.
2.   Change the height of your text.  You made the drawing larger
     when you changed the drawing limits so the text height must be
     adjusted to be visible.
     Select Text from the Settings menu. If drawing in decimal
     units, an appropriate text height would be 3 (3'in
     architectural units). Enter the desired value in the Height
     field.  Select OK.
3.   Select Horizontal Dimension (Horiz Dim) from the Measure menu.
4.   Pick the top left corner of the box, as your first point, and
     the top right corner as your second point.
5.   Pick a point just above the box for the dimension line
     location. 
6.   Text will read 150'-0"(Architectural units) or 150 (Decimal
     units).
 
For more information on this procedure, see "Dimensioning" in The
AutoSketch Reference Manual.

              Plotting or Printing the Drawing to Scale

Using the drawing created above, follow these steps:

1.   Select Plot Area or Print Area from the File Menu.
     To fit the drawing on A size paper, approximately 8 x 10
     inches (the default), the drawing will need to be plotted at
     approximately 1/16" scale (1/16"=1').
2.   In the Scaling section, enter 16' for Drawing Units. Leave
     Plotting Units at 1".  If you are working with decimal units,
     the values would be 16 and 1.
     Since the drawing is wider than it is tall, the plot box will
     need to be rotated in order to fit around the drawing.
3.   Place a check in the box marked Rotate 90 Degrees. Select OK. 
     A plot box which surrounds the drawing will be displayed.
     Select Accept to accept the plot box drawn.
4.   In order to view the entire plot box, you may wish to select
     Zoom Full or zoom Last Plot Box from the View menu.  
5.   If everything looks satisfactory, select Print or Plot from
     the File menu to plot the drawing.     

         Plotting or Printing the Drawing to Fit the Paper

     If you don't have any plot boxes defined, select Print/Plot to
     print or plot your drawing to fit on the paper.  In this case,
     you will need to rotate the plot first.  To do so, select Plot
     (or Print Area).  Select Plot to Extents, and select Rotate 90
     Degrees.  Select OK.  A preview of the plot box will be
     displayed, which should encompass the entire drawing.  Select
     Accept.  Then select Print or Plot from the File menu
     (whichever is displayed) to print or plot the drawing.

(page 7)                                     Part no. SK3RD-1

 
For more information on Plot Boxes and Plotting, see "Plotting and
Printing" in The AutoSketch Reference Manual.

      Autodesk Device Interface (ADI) & Terminate-and-Stay-
                     Resident (TSR) Drivers

ADI drivers and/or TSR programs use memory that is typically
available to AutoSketch.  If you do not have extended/expanded
memory on your system, you may not be able to completely read in
larger sample drawings, due to memory limitations.                











































(page 8)                                     Part no. SK3RD-1
037 AUTO Sketch For windows 5×HD
README.TXT [展开]
                      AUTOSKETCH FOR WINDOWS 
                         README DOCUMENT
                            05/19/92


  This document contains information on late developments not
  included in the AutoSketch manuals.

  To view this document online:

  - Click the Maximize button in the upper-right corner
    of this window. The readme document is easier to read
    in a maximized window.

  To move through this document:

  - Click the scroll arrow buttons at the right side of
    this window or press PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN. 

  To print this document:

  - Choose Print from the File menu.


  AUTOSKETCH README TOPICS

  This readme document contains the following topics:

  1. INSTALLING AUTOSKETCH

     1.1  Upgrading to Microsoft Windows 3.1
     1.2  Using the AutoSketch Setup Program
     1.3  Printer Drivers
     1.4  Hewlett-Packard Plotters
     1.5  Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Printers

  2. USING AUTOSKETCH

     2.1 File Menu
     2.2 Aerial View
     2.3 Toolboxes
     2.4 Text Editor
     2.5 Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
     2.6 Pasting Color Drawings into Other Applications
     2.7 Print Settings
     2.8 Color Printing 
     2.9 Macros
         2.9.1 Recording Macros
         2.9.2 Editing Macro Files   
         2.9.3 New SET Variables
         2.9.4 New Macro Commands



  1. INSTALLING AUTOSKETCH


     1.1 Upgrading to Microsoft Windows 3.1

         If you haven't already done so, we highly recommend that
         you upgrade to Microsoft Windows 3.1.  This new version
         of Windows has many enhancements, including improved 
         printer support and increases in speed and performance.



     1.2 Using the AutoSketch Setup Program

         If the wrong Setup program appears, you might have the
         wrong disk in drive A or you might have typed the wrong
         information.  Make sure you insert AutoSketch disk 1 in
         drive A, close the drive door, and enter a:setup.

         Depending on your system configuration, the Setup program
         might offer RAM drives and network drives as valid
         installation drives.  Make sure that you select a FIXED
         DISK drive.



     1.3 Printer Drivers

         If you have problems printing with AutoSketch, you might
         need to change the Transmission Retry value for your 
         printer or plotter.  We recommend that you set the value 
         to 120 seconds.  To change the value, open the Windows
         Control Panel and choose Printers.  Click the Connect
         button to display the Connect dialog box where you
         can change the Transmission Retry value.  

         If you've reset the Transmission Retry value and you 
         still have printing problems, you might want to upgrade
         to Windows 3.1.  Windows 3.1 includes many improved 
         printer drivers.  You can also obtain the most recent 
         Windows driver for your printer by contacting the 
         printer dealer or manufacturer.

   

     1.4 Hewlett-Packard Plotters

         There are two ways to connect a Hewlett-Packard plotter
         to your computer: using Hardware Handshaking or XON/XOFF
         Flow Control.  To plot with AutoSketch for Windows, we
         recommend that you use Hardware Handshaking.  Depending 
         upon the model of your Hewlett-Packard plotter, you 
         might need to use Hardware Handshake cabling and the 
         following settings:

               Baud Rate:  9600
               Data Bits:  7
               Parity:     Even
               Stop Bits:  1
               Flow Control: Hardware


         To change these settings, open the Control Panel and
         select the Printers icon.  Select the Connect... option
         and select one of the available serial communication
         ports (for example, COM1 or COM2).  Then select the
         Settings... option.  The "Settings for COMx" dialog box
         lets you configure the communication settings for that
         port.


         Following is a diagram of a Hewlett-Packard serial cable
         that works with AutoSketch for Windows.

                 HP Serial Cable 17255D

                 Computer    Plotter


                    1 --------- 1

                    3 --------- 2

                    2 --------- 3

                    5 ----+            
                          |
                    6 --------- 20

                   20 --------- 5    (not necessary)
                          |
                          +---- 6    (not necessary)

                    7 --------- 7


         Note: The top 5 to 6 to 20 connection with the loopback
         on the computer end is necessary for Hardware Handshaking
         to work properly.  The bottom 5 to 6 to 20 pin connection
         with the loopback on the plotter side is NOT necessary.
         Many serial cables include this extra set of pin
         connections so the cable can be reversed and still
         function properly.

         

     1.5 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Printers

         If you have problems printing to a HP LaserJet, you might
         have insufficient memory installed in your printer or the
         Memory option in the Printer Setup might be set
         incorrectly.  To print with a HP LaserJet, we recommend
         that you have at least one megabyte of memory installed.

         To see how much memory is installed in your printer, run
         the printer's Self Test.  (See your printer manual for
         instructions.)  If the printer has sufficient memory and
         you still have problems, open the Windows Printer Setup
         dialog box and make sure that the Memory option is set to
         one or more megabytes of memory.  You can open the
         Printer Setup dialog box from the Window's Control Panel
         or from the Print Settings dialog box in AutoSketch.



  2. USING AUTOSKETCH


     2.1 File Menu

         At the bottom of the File menu, AutoSketch displays the
         names of the last five drawings you opened.  You can open
         one of those drawings from the File menu by clicking the
         filename.



     2.2 Aerial View

         In the Aerial View window, all pattern-filled objects
         display as outlines only. 



     2.3 Toolboxes

         When you create a custom toolbox, AutoSketch displays its
         name in the menu bar.

         If a toolbox appears in the main toolbox window, its
         Control menu contains a Close command.  The Close command
         lets you close the toolbox in the main toolbox window
         without removing its name from the menu bar.  You can
         then display another toolbox in the main toolbox window
         by clicking the corresponding name on the menu bar.

         If part of a toolbox is obscured when you resize the
         AutoSketch window, an arrow button appears next to the
         toolbox Control-menu button.  You can click the arrow
         button to scroll the buttons in the toolbox.



     2.4 Text Editor

         When you open the Text Editor, Word Wrap is turned off.
         If you import a text file or edit a text entity, you
         might need to click the Word Wrap check box to display
         all of the text.  (A check mark indicates that Word Wrap
         is on.)

         If you accidentally remove text with the Backspace key,
         you can restore it by pressing Alt+Backspace immediately.



     2.5 Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

         When you run AutoSketch for the first time, it is
         automatically registered as an OLE application.
         Information about AutoSketch, AutoSketch drawing files,
         and the location of the AutoSketch executable file
         (sketch.exe) are recorded in the registration process.
         If you move the AutoSketch executable file after running
         AutoSketch, OLE will not work correctly.  If you move
         sketch.exe, you must use the Microsoft Windows 3.1
         Regedit utility to delete "AutoSketch" as a "Registered
         File Type."  The next time you start AutoSketch, it will
         be registered automatically at its new location.


         To make a few changes to an AutoSketch drawing linked to
         a document, you can simply double-click the object to
         start AutoSketch.  To make extensive changes to an
         AutoSketch drawing linked to a document, we recommend
         that you exit the document's application and start
         AutoSketch from the Program Manager.  If you start
         AutoSketch from the document's application, the link is
         dynamically updated with each change to the drawing,
         which can slow down the editing process.



     2.6 Pasting Color Drawings into Other Applications

         If you use the Clipboard to paste an AutoSketch drawing
         into a document created with another application, objects
         drawn in some of the lighter colors might not display or
         print.  Usually this is because the lighter colors in
         AutoSketch are mapped to white in other applications.
         The color white is often the background color and
         therefore does not display or print.  If you experience
         this problem, you can use the Change Property tool in the
         Edit toolbox to change "missing" objects to other colors
         before copying them to the Clipboard.



     2.7 Print Settings

         In the Print Settings dialog box, if you turn off Print
         to Extents, AutoSketch resets the scaling factors to
         their default values (1 Drawing Unit = 1 Printing Unit).
         If you turn on Print to Extents, AutoSketch automatically
         adjusts the scaling factors to the extents of the current
         print box (indicated by the X Print Size and Y Print
         Size).

         AutoSketch saves the X Print Size and Y Print Size with
         the drawing.  If a drawing contains a print box sized for
         a printer other than the one you're currently using, you
         might have to change the print sizes.  To reset the X
         Print Size and Y Print Size to the maximum sizes for the
         current printer, click the Setup button in the Print
         Settings dialog box.  Then click OK in the Setup dialog
         box.  AutoSketch resets the X Print Size and Y Print Size
         for the current printer.



     2.8 Color Printing 

         In AutoSketch, color number 255 is white.  Objects drawn
         using color 255 are displayed in a shade of gray in
         AutoSketch.  However, those objects are sent to the
         Windows Print Manager as the color white.  Since most
         Windows printer drivers recognize white as the background
         color, these objects might not print.

         If your color printer uses dithering to create 255 colors
         (as the HP PaintJet does) and you plan to use colors
         other than numbers 1 through 7, you might want to make a
         test drawing to see how those colors print on your color
         printer.  We suggest drawing small Pattern Fill objects
         with the solid fill pattern.  First try printing the
         drawing with Fill turned off, then try printing the
         drawing with Fill turned on.  These tests will show how
         filled objects and narrow lines print in color.



     2.9 Macros


         2.9.1 Recording Macros

         You cannot play a macro while recording a macro.  Because
         all custom SketchTools play macros, you should NOT select
         custom SketchTools while recording a macro.  If you
         select a custom SketchTool, the Record Macro tool
         terminates.


         
         2.9.2 Editing Macro Files

         You can modify a macro file using any ASCII text editor.
         Appendix C of the "AutoSketch Reference Manual" describes
         the commands that macro files use.  If you use the SET
         command to set system variables that use specific data
         types, this information might be helpful:


         - For the Boolean data type, 1=On and 0=Off.


         - For the Real data type, you can use any number
           (including decimal numbers, exponential notation, and
           architectural units), such as 3, -5, 1/2", .0987, 10.0,
           1.345e2, and 10.51.


         - For the Integer data type, you can use whole numbers
           only, such as 1, 8, and -16.


         - For the String data type, you create a list of text
           characters (where a character can also be a number).




         2.9.3 New SET Variables    

         We added some new SET variables to the AutoSketch Macro
         Language after the "AutoSketch Reference Manual" went to
         press.  These new variables are described below.


         VARIABLE NAME  DATA TYPE  DESCRIPTION
         -------------  ---------  -------------------------------
         ARCMODE        Boolean    Arc Mode On/Off

         BUTTONDIR      String     Location of button bitmap files

         CAPTIONHELP    Boolean    Caption Help On/Off

         COORDTYPE      Integer    Coordinate display type
                                     0 = Absolute Coordinates
                                     1 = Polar Coordinates
                                     2 = Relative Coordinates
                                     3 = Last Point Coordinates
                                     4 = No coordinates

         DIMSLIDE       Boolean    Dimension slide mode On/Off

         ENTHILIGHTON   Boolean    Highlight selected entities 
                                   On/Off

         FILLMODE       Boolean    Fill/Outline pattern-fill 
                                   entities On/Off

         FRAME          Boolean    Display curve frame On/Off

         POPUPS         Boolean    Show/Hide pop-up toolboxes 
                                   On/Off

         PRINTTOFILE    Boolean    Print to file On/Off

         SAVETODOS      Boolean    Save drawing to AutoSketch DOS
                                   Version 3.0 file format during
                                   SaveFileAs command

         SMARTCURSOR    Boolean    SmartCursor(R) On/Off

         TEXTMODE       Boolean    Draw/Outline text entities 
                                   On/Off

         TOOLBOXES      Boolean    Show/Hide all toolboxes On/Off

         UNDODIR        String     Undo file directory

         UNDOON         Boolean    Undo On/Off

         WINDOWCENTERX  Real       Drawing x coordinate for center
                                   of current view

         WINDOWCENTERY  Real       Drawing y coordinate for center
                                   of current view

         WINDOWSIZE     Real       Height of current view in
                                   drawing units


         2.9.4 New Macro Commands

         We added some new macro commands to the AutoSketch Macro
         Language after the "AutoSketch Reference Manual" went to
         press.  These new macro commands are described below.


         COMMAND NAME      DESCRIPTION
         ------------      --------------------------------------
         ButtonEditor      Displays the Button Editor dialog box. 

         CreateToolbox     Displays the Toolbox Editor dialog box.

         EditToolbox       Displays the Toolbox Editor dialog box.

         Game              Displays the AutoSketch game.

                           Note: Actions you make in the Button
                                 Editor, Toolbox Editor, or
                                 AutoSketch game cannot be
                                 recorded in a macro.

         Information       Displays the About AutoSketch
                           information box.

         OpenToolBox       Displays the Open Toolbox dialog box.
                           Actions you make in this dialog box
                           cannot be recorded in a macro.

         Preferences       Opens the AutoSketch Preferences dialog
                           box.

         SetPrintName      Opens the Print Filename dialog box.

         ToggleCaptionHelp Toggles Caption Help on or off.

         TogglePopups      Shows or hides pop-up toolboxes.

         ToggleSmartCursor Toggles the SmartCursor on or off.

         ToggleTextMode    Toggles between displaying text 
                           entities or their outlines.

         ToggleToolboxes   Shows or hides all toolboxes.
038 MS Abode Illustrator V4.0 8×HD
高级绘图软件,可将点阵图象转化为由Bezier曲线组成的图形
README.TXT [展开]
=================================================================
THE ADOBE« TYPEALIGN« 2.1 - WINDOWS VERSION
=================================================================

PLEASE READ THIS FILE. IT CONTAINS LAST-MINUTE INFORMATION 
THAT WAS NOT INCLUDED IN THE DOCUMENTATION.


FILES INCLUDED ON THE ADOBE TYPEALIGN 2.1 DISKS
=================================================================
     TYPEALGN.EXE -  Program (Requires ATM) 
     INSTALL.EXE  -  Installer (Windows Application)
     TAHELP.HLP   -  Online help file
     TAPALETT.INI -  Sample palettes
     TYPEALGN.FON -  Special font for TypeAlign
     README.TXT   -  Information not included in manual
     SAMPLE FILES -  Included in two subdirectories


REREADING AND PRINTING THIS FILE
=================================================================
If you wish to print this file, or reread it at a later 
time, simply open the file named 'README.TXT' in the 
'C:\TYPEALGN' directory using Notepad or the text editor
of your choice.


USING SAMPLE FILES WITH THE ADOBE TYPEALIGN PROGRAM
=================================================================
We have included two different sets of sample artwork
on the Adobe TypeAlign program disks. Each set has been 
specially formatted to display properly with the different 
sets of fonts included with the Adobe Type Manager 
program.

You will only need to keep one directory of sample artwork 
on your hard disk. If you purchased a copy of the Adobe 
Type Manager program separately, you should have received
a copy of the Helvetica and Times outline fonts. To save
disk space, delete the directory 'GILLTIMN' and all the
files included in it. These files were formatted for the
'GillSans' and 'TimesNewRomanPS' fonts.

If you received the Adobe Type Manager program through a 
special packaging promotiom (for example, with your copy of
Aldus PageMaker or Aldus Persuasion), you should have 
received the 'GillSans' and 'TimesNewRomanPS' outline fonts. 
To save space on your hard disk, delete the directory 
'HELVTIMS' and all the files included in it. These files 
were formatted for the 'Helvetica' and 'Times' outline 
fonts.

Both of these directories can be found on your hard disk
in the 'C:\TYPEALGN' directory.

 
COPYING YOUR ARTWORK AS A METAFILE
=================================================================
Some applications require a different type of file format 
to copy and paste elements through the Clipboard. For in-
stance, CorelDraw Version 2.0 will not accept items that
have been copied to the Clipboard by the TypeAlign program, 
therefore, a special version of the Copy command has been
included for use with these applications.

If you hold the Control key down as you choose Copy from 
the Edit menu, the Adobe TypeAlign program will copy your 
selected element as a plain Windows Metafile. This will 
allow you to place your Adobe TypeAlign artwork into these 
programs in outline artwork form.

Alternatively, you can export your artwork by saving it 
as an Encapsulated PostScript (EPS), Illustrator 3.0 (AI), 
or Windows Metafile (WMF) format. These formats can be 
used for importing your Adobe TypeAlign artwork into most 
page-layout and draw programs.


USING THE COURIER FONT WITH THE ADOBE TYPEALIGN PROGRAM
=================================================================
To use the Courier font with the Adobe TypeAlign program 
you must have Version 1.15, or later, of the Adobe Type Manager pro-
gram. Please contact Adobe Technical Support for infor-
mation on obtaining the upgrade.


WORKING WITH CORELDRAW, DESIGNER, CHARISMA, & LEGACY
=================================================================
CorelDraw 1.2 and 2.0, Designer 3.0, Charisma 2.0, and 
Legacy 1.1, at the time of this release, do not fully 
support Adobe TypeAlign selected effects that are copied 
and pasted from the Clipboard into these application 
programs. Alternatively, you can import the Adobe TypeAlign 
artwork in EPS, AI, or WMF file format, or you can copy and 
paste the artwork using the special Ctrl-Copy command 
discussed in COPYING YOUR ARTWORK AS A METAFILE, above.


PRINTING EPS FORMATED ARTWORK ON NON-POSTSCRIPT PRINTERS
=================================================================
When importing an Adobe TypeAlign file into your docu-
ment, we recommend that you use the EPS file format to 
achieve the highest quality output. However, this is 
recommended only if you are planning to print your docu-
ments to a PostScript printer. If you need to print your 
documents to a non-PostScript printer, any EPS format 
artwork in your document will print the original screen 
bitmap at a much lower resolution than your printer is 
capable of. We recommend that you use either the Copy and
Paste option discussed in COPYING YOUR ARTWORK AS A META-
FILE, above, or save your Adobe TypeAlign artwork in the 
Metafile (WMF) format for non-PostScript printers.


NAMING A CUSTOM COLOR PALETTE
=================================================================
Names for color palettes must not contain any spaces.  
If you want to use a palette name that has two distinct 
words, use an underscore (underline) character to separate
them (for example, RED_HUES).


OPENING '.TAL' FILES IN THE ADOBE TYPEALIGN PROGRAM
=================================================================
The Adobe TypeAlign program provides a number of ways to 
export your artwork to other applications. However, the
Adobe TypeAlign program itself will open ONLY files creat-
ed by the Adobe TypeAlign program (the .TAL file format). 
With this in mind, be sure to save a copy of all your 
artwork in the '.TAL' file format, even if you also
wish to export your artwork to another format. This 
will ensure that you will have an editable copy of the 
file should you decide to further refine your artwork in
the Adobe TypeAlign program.


Ventura Publisher 4.0 and .WMF importing
=================================================================
When importing a .wmf file into Ventura Publisher 4.0 the .wmf 
file does not appear, but will print.


=================================================================
DOCUMENTATION CHANGES
=================================================================

RESETTING THE ORIGIN OF RULERS
=================================================================
Page 9, 4th paragraph, should read: To reset either ruler
origin to its original position, double-click the desired
ruler.

ADDITIONAL EXPORT FILE FORMAT
=================================================================
Page 14: We have added a new format to the export
list, Windows Metafile (WMF). For more information on
Metafiles, please refer to your Windows 3.0 documentation.
039 Photo Shop V2.5 4×HD
高级图象处理软件,可对图象做多种计算,带有统计功能,支持多种格式
FILE_ID.DIZ [展开]
┌────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Adobe PhotoShop - Version 2.50         ├┐
│ -------------------------------------- ││
│ The world's leading photo design and   ││
│ production tool. It lets you create    ││
│ exactly what you imagine. With Adobe   ││
│ PhotoShop and your computer, you can   ││
│ design and produce color and black-&-  ││
│ white images, right at your desk.      ││
│ Start with a blank screen or scanned   ││
│ images, then add or correct color,     ││
│ execute delicate retouching, import    ││
│ illustration files, create duotones,   ││
│ tritones and quadtones, and more.      ││
└┬─────────────────────────[ Disk #1/4 ]─┘│
 └─[ StuDio BBs ]─────────────────────────┘
040 PHOTO SHOP 5×TD
FILE_ID.DIZ
╒P▌▌b▐#±╢╥┴qÜ$mmδαÑΘ¿ªτσeτ∞++Ωig¬é╚Xt┌v▌Tφ@╡▓░¼╗▓¿╗║╞╘╗╢▒╖┌
╦CÇ√W├a¥kQ3
ZäÖÜy║╝┤	AGS-sí[MQR┬«╫(J[Ω|îx╢5V╡íjδe*p/)¡gΣv/░+M7ßσ\U╧╥RUY╞3_me_S▄╥[W├N╔╤R╫╬QO¼ñ»º¿ó	EL╧¥α≡mΦí⌐¡`╛┌╩δ*≥τ≈Ωéƒn!ß«█:╠TQ?[█¢ûy╣∙bYT╧R╓SiU╬XSSUX┘▌[][Vë╗LwzΩ█;Kèè*╠ZÜ·¬∙╩∩ò╛EHJ∙╚¿╠╝═o9C?HO,πâ╫ùé╥2Æ
041 THE PRINT SHOP DELUXE COMPANION 3×TD
042 THE PRINT SHOP DELUXE LIBRARY F/W 9×TD
README [展开]
*****************************************************************
*                                                               *
*    This file contains last minute information that is not     *
*    in the reference manual for the Graphics Exporter.         *
*    If you have problems, try some of the suggestions here     *
*    before calling Technical Support-(708) 215-5111.           *
*                                                               *
*    We make the following recommendations when you are         *
*    using third party programs to import graphics that         *
*    have been exported using the Graphics Exporter.            *
*    For best results follow these guidelines when              * 
*    importing graphics into these products.                    *
*                                                               *
*****************************************************************

When using Adobe Illustrator, export graphics in EPS (without
preview) format.  If you wish to view your graphics onscreen
and/or you do not have a PostScript printer, export in CGM format.

When using Aldus PageMaker, export graphics in EPS 
(with or without Preview) if you have a PostScript 
printer.  Otherwise PCX exported "large" will be best.

When using Arts & Letters, export graphics in TIFF format.
For best results export them "large".

When using Harvard Graphics export graphics in PCX format.  For
best results export them "large".  The graphic will need to
be resized once it has been imported into Harvard Graphics.

When using Windows 3.1 Paintbrush, export graphics in PCX format.
For best results export them "large".

When using Publisher's Paintbrush, export graphics in PCX format.
For best results export them "large".

When using Ventura Publisher, export graphics in EPS (with
or without Preview) if you have a PostScript printer.  Otherwise
PCX exported "large" will be best.

When using WordPerfect, export graphics in EPS (with or
without Preview) if you have a PostScript printer.  Otherwise
PCX exported "large" will be best.  Remember that WordPerfect
will not print your graphics in color unless you 
are using a color PostScript printer.

*****************************************************************
*                                                               *
*         Exporting to The New Print Shop Format (NPS)          *
*                                                               *
*****************************************************************

With version 1.1 of the Graphics Exporter, graphics can be exported
directly into a library that The New Print Shop can use.

Since Print Shop Deluxe and The New Print Shop use very different 
graphic formats, data must modified or removed from the Print Shop Deluxe 
graphic in order to make it be compatible with The New Print Shop.  
The resulting graphic will have a much lower resolution and will not 
retain the detail of the original graphic.  Basically, object oriented 
graphics will not always retain their detail when they are converted for 
use in bit-mapped based applications.

Also, the smaller the resulting graphic, the more data must be removed.
It is recommended that when you utilize exported graphics in The New
Print Shop, use a Large Graphic whenever possible. Large graphics
retain more data, and therefore have more resolution than medium or
small graphics.

For more information on using graphics in The New Print Shop, see 
"Choosing and Placing the Graphics" in The New Print Shop manual.
_______________________________________________________________________

Graphics Exporter Version 1.1 distributed by Konami, Inc.
Copyright (c) 1992 Broderbund Software, Inc.  All trademarks and
registered trademarks belong to their respective companies.
043 MS-Power Point V2.0 5×HD
044 MS-Power Point V3.0 7×HD
著名的演示及幻灯片制作系统,支持256色,多种渐变填色形式,很容易绘制流程图和结构图,画面极其精美
045 Power builder V3.0 10×TD
README.TXT [展开]
                                       POWERSOFT POWERBUILDER [TM]

               (C) Copyright 1991-1993 Powersoft Corporation.  All rights reserved.
                                                            Version 3.0


                                                  (Use scroll bar to review)



  BEFORE INSTALLING POWERBUILDER

  1.  IMPORTANT:  If Microsoft Windows is installed in a write-protected network 
       directory, a person with write privileges to the Windows directory must install 
       this product.

  2.  Review the Product Release Notes, if any, for special instructions pertaining to
       the installation of this product.

  3.  Be sure that no Powersoft products or the Watcom SQL engine are running.


  TO INSTALL POWERBUILDER

  1.  Insert the diskette labeled "Disk 1 of 5" into the floppy drive of your computer.

  2.  Run the SETUP program on the diskette.  You can do this in one of three ways.
       (This example uses Drive A, however, your floppy drive may be a different letter.)

           *  From the DOS prompt, type:  WIN A:\SETUP
           *  From Windows Program Manager, choose File/Run and type:  A:\SETUP
           *  From Windows File Manager, double-click on the SETUP.EXE file on Drive A.

  3.  Below is a brief description of what is installed when you make your selections:

           *  PowerBuilder Enterprise Edition:  Includes all files necessary to run the
               Powersoft PowerBuilder development environment.  When installing this
               selection, the PowerBuilder ODBC Database driver and initialization file,
               PBODB030.DLL and PBODB030.INI, are installed in the PowerBuilder
               directory.
           *  Sample Application:  Files that provide a collection of examples which 
               demonstrate PowerBuilder features.  Although this is optional, we
               recommend that you install it.
           *  PowerBuilder Sample Database:  Installs the PowerBuilder Demo Database
               and Database Log files.  This is a prerequisite when installing the Sample
               Application.
           *  WATCOM SQL:  Installs files to run WATCOM SQL in the PowerBuilder
               environment.  This option is required when installing the Sample
               Application.
           *  Open Database Connectivity Drivers:  Based on your selections, the
               appropriate vendor ODBC drivers are installed in your Windows system
               subdirectory (for example, c:\windows\system).

  4.  The installation procedure will prompt you:

           *  When the procedure needs the next diskette or more information, or when
               it requires a decision to change or replace files.  Respond to the prompts
               and select options as appropriate.

           *  When the procedure finds existing Powersoft initialization (*.INI) files in
               the target directory or newer versions of ODBC drivers in your Windows
               system subdirectory, such as ODBC.DLL and ODBCINST.DLL.  If you are
               unsure as to how to proceed, we suggest that you consult your system
               administrator for direction.
   
           *  When the procedure is ready to update your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  You can
               choose to let the installation procedure change the existing file, create a
               new file for you, or proceed without making any file changes.

           *  When the procedure is ready to add the PowerBuilder and WATCOM
               program items to a Program Manager group.  You can choose to let the
               installation procedure create the Program Group and add the Program
               Items.  To familiarize yourself with the Program Items, we strongly
               recommend that you allow this installation procedure to create the
               Program Group, and delete any unnecessary Program Items afterwards.

  5.  Exit to DOS and verify that the Powersoft directory(s) is included in your DOS
       PATH command.  This will happen automatically if you let the installation
       procedure update your AUTOEXEC.BAT file in the previous step.

  6.  Re-boot your PC and start Windows.


  FOR FURTHER INFORMATION

  1.  Powersoft offers an electronic Bulletin Board Service to all users of Powersoft
       Enterprise Series products. This BBS enables you to upload PowerBuilder
       libraries for review by the technical support team.  It also enables you to
       download fixes, code samples, documentation, the latest training course
       schedules, and PowerNotes (a series of technical writeups).  You can access
       the BBS 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, without a fee.

           *  Powersoft BBS phone number:  (617) 229-9735
           *  Connect information:  8 DataBits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit, and
                                                  speeds of up to 9600 BPS are supported.

  2.  Powersoft FaxBack provides information in the form of code samples, tips,
       techniques, and other documentation sent to your fax machine.  You can use
       FaxBack 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, without a fee.

           *  Powersoft FaxBack phone number:  (617) 238-6800

  3.  If you are a CompuServe subscriber, you can use the Powersoft forum, which
       is dedicated to answering questions about products, services, and technical
       issues.  To access this forum on CompuServe, type:  GO POWERSOFT

  4.  For availability of additional ODBC drivers, check the Powersoft Bulletin Board
       Service or CompuServe.

  5.  For technical support when installing PowerBuilder, call (617) 238-1212 from
       9 a.m. to 8 p.m. Eastern time, Monday-Friday.

  6.  To receive ongoing Telephone Support, call (800) 395-3525 for information.


                                   (C) Copyright 1991-1993 Powersoft Corporation

  Powersoft Corporation ("Powersoft") claims copyright in this Program and
  documentation as an unpublished work, versions of which were first licensed on the
  date indicated in the foregoing notice.  Claim of copyright does not imply waiver of
  Powersoft's other rights.  See Notice of Proprietary Rights.


                                            NOTICE OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS

  This program and documentation are confidential trade secrets and the property of
  Powersoft.  Use, examination, reproduction, copying, disassembly, decompilation,
  transfer and/or disclosure to others are strictly prohibited except by express
  written agreement with Powersoft.
046 MS-Publisher V1.0 3×HD
用于制作图表,报告,贺卡等
047 PUBLISH 6×HD
README.TXT [展开]
Microsoft Publisher 2.0 README.TXT
==================================

We've placed important information about Publisher in a
Help file named README.HLP located on this disk.

To access this file:
1)  Go to the Windows Program Manager.
2)  From the File menu, choose Run.
    Windows displays the Run dialog box.
3)  In the Command Line box, type WINHELP.EXE A:\README.HLP,
    where A: is the drive from which you are installing.
4)  Choose OK.
    Windows displays Publisher's Read Me Help file.
048 M.S. PUBLISHER 2.0 F/W 6×HD
README.TXT [展开]
Microsoft Publisher 2.0 README.TXT
==================================

We've placed important information about Publisher in a
Help file named README.HLP located on this disk.

To access this file:
1)  Go to the Windows Program Manager.
2)  From the File menu, choose Run.
    Windows displays the Run dialog box.
3)  In the Command Line box, type WINHELP.EXE A:\README.HLP,
    where A: is the drive from which you are installing.
4)  Choose OK.
    Windows displays Publisher's Read Me Help file.
049 M.S. PUBLISHER DESIGN PACK F/W 2×TD
050 Instant Artist V1.00 4×HD
极实用的贺卡,请谏,标语,告示制作软件
051 PC Painobrush V + 2×HD
图象编辑支持PCX,TIF GIF等格式,支持高分辨率,256色,可使用2440,48点阵汉字库
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.IMG 2.IMG
052 Picture Publisher V3.1 5×TD
053 Picture Publisher V4.0 4×TD
图象处理软件,可调整颜色,增强或淡化边界,对黑白图象着色,将多个图象合为一体,可自制背景,含多种过滤器
054 Winlmages: Morph V1.0 2×HD
图象溶合工具
055 Morph V1.0 3×HD
图象溶合工具
056 MORE AFTER DARK F/W ( screen saver) 1×TD
原始 1.DDI DISK1
057 MORPH F/W 3×HD
原始 1.DDI 2.DDI 3.DDI
058 WINIMAGE:MORPH FOR WINDOWS V1.07 2×HD
059 WINIMAGE:24-BIT/2D MORPHING SOFTWARE 2×HD
FILE_ID.DIZ
WinImages: 24-bit/2D Morphing Software [1/2]
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.DDI 2.DDI
060 FAXS 1×HD
豪华图象编辑软件061 Graphics Works 果处理及变换,可将MAC,TGA,IMG,CUT,PCX,BMP,GIF,MSP,TIG,LBM,WPG,PIC等格式相互转换
README.TXT
    This Artec Mouse diskette totally contains eighty nine files that could
be divided into two categories: for DOS application and for Windows 3.0
applicatin. There are two auxiliary files (DOS.TXT and WINDOWS.TXT)
containing detail information for this two application in this diskette.
DOS.TXT contains the information for DOS application and WINDOWS.TXT
contains the information for Windows 3.0 application. We recommend that
you read them in detail before installing the Artec mouse driver.
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.IMG
062 WINDOWSCRAFT V1.0 1×HD
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.DDI
063 MICROGRAFX WINDOWS DRAW! V2.0 6×HD
064 WINEXIT FOR WINDOWS 1×HD
README.TXT [展开]
WinExit		Copyright ⌐1990 by Howard Silver
                CompuServ - 76675,3476

		(for Windows 3.0 or higher)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Well, this is one of those simple little programs that can make life
a little easier.  The purpose of this program is simply to allow you
to double-click on an icon and shutdown Windows.  This I found to be
easier than going through Program Manager.

You can just simply exit Windows, or configure it to display a dialog
box asking you if you really want to exit.  This is similar to what
you get from Program Manager. 

			BUT DON'T WORRY!.

This method of closing down Windows is the same way Program Manager
does it.  So no work will be lost.  For example, let's say you have
EXCEL running with a spreadsheet you just created or modified, but
haven't saved yet.  EXCEL (and all running programs) will get notified
by Windows that it is closing down, so you have a chance to save your
work.

		========================================
		    ================================
		        ========================
		            ================

To install WinExit, just add it to the LOAD= line in your WIN.INI file.
The program is setup to only allow one instance of itself.  I didn't
see a point to have two running.

WinExit's system menu has 3 new options.  The first is the menu
equivilent of double-clicking the icon.  At the bottom of the menu is
the ABOUT box and the EXIT DIALOG BOX option.  The EXIT DIALOG BOX
option is a toggle.  If this is toggled on (a checkmark will appear),
when you double-click a dialog box will appear asking you if you really
want to exit.  This setting is saved in the WIN.INI file under the
keyword [WinExit].


I would like to here your opinions and suggestions on WinExit.

I am releasing this program in public domain.



Howard Silver
76675,3476
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.DDI
065 PASSPORT DESIGN TRAX V2.20 1×HD
README.TXT [展开]
README File for TRAX

PASSPORT DESIGNS
100 Stone Pine Rd.
Half Moon Bay, CA 94019
(415) 726-0280


INSTALLING TRAX

Installing TRAX is easy.  You simply boot your computer and run
the TRAX installer program, SETUP.  In addition to the TRAX 
application, you can also install some sample music files.

The end of this document contains additional information about 
Windows, MIDI Drivers, Port and IRQ settings and troubleshooting 
tips.

MIDI setup

Although you can use TRAX without a MIDI instrument, in order to use
TRAX with a MIDI instrument, you must configure the software so that
it can communicate properly with your hardware. See the instructions
below.


INSTALLATION

By running the Setup program from within Windows, you can quickly 
and easily install TRAX and all related files.

Note:  For the following installation Microsoft Windows must 
already be installed on your hard disk.

To install TRAX from Windows with the Multimedia Extensions 
or Windows 3.1 or later:

1. Run Windows.
2. Insert the TRAX Program Disk into your computer's disk 
drive (A: or B:).
3. Choose "Run" from the File menu of the Windows Program 
Manager. The Run dialog appears.
4. In the "Command Line" text box, enter A:SETUP (or B:SETUP if 
the Program Disk is in drive B:).
5. Click OK or press Enter to run the TRAX Setup program.
The Setup dialog appears.

The default drive and directory to which TRAX will be copied 
are displayed in a text box.  If you want to install TRAX in a 
different directory or drive, simply make the appropriate changes to 
the text box.

Several installation options are listed in the box at the bottom of the 
dialog.  These include installation of the TRAX program files and 
MIDI drivers  The options are pre-selected (reverse highlighted) for 
installation (the Passport MIDI drivers will automatically be de-selected on 
Multimedia PCs or PCs running Windows 3.1 or later).  
De-select any options that you do not want.

6. Click OK and follow the on-screen prompts.
A dialog appears that asks if you would like the Setup program to 
create a TRAX Program Group in the Windows Program 
Manager.
7. Click Yes or press Enter to create a TRAX Program Group.


MIDI setup

Although you can use TRAX without a MIDI instrument , in order
to use TRAX with a MIDI instrument, you must configure the software
so that it can communicate properly with your hardware.

1. Open the TRAX Program Group in the Windows Program Manager
   (if it is not already open), and double-click the TRAX icon
   to run the program.
2. Pull down the Goodies menu and choose the MIDI Setup item.
   The MIDI Setup dialog appears.

Ports

TRAX can communicate with the MIDI world over any one of your
computer's output ports. This lets TRAX address sixteen MIDI
channels over any port. 

There are three drop down list boxes that enable you to make port 
assignments. The first box lets you designate the output port of
your interface. This list box allows you to select which of your
computer's MIDI hardware ports will be used for MIDI playback.
TRAX's output can also be routed to the onboard synthesizers on
sound cards like Anchor Electronics' Media Concept board, Creative
Labs' Sound Blaster and Media Vision's Pro AudioSpectrum.

Next to the output port list box is a check box labeled "Send
Sync". Click this box to transmit MIDI sync messages on that port.
TRAX sends MIDI song position pointer, MIDI start, stop and
continue and MIDI clocks.

The next list box, labeled "Record port" tells TRAX which port is 
connected to the MIDI controller with which you'll enter notes onto 
your score.

TRAX can play or record based on your computer's own internal 
clock or on a MIDI song position pointer and MIDI clocks received 
from an outside source.  If you'll be synchronizing your computer to 
an external signal, you may want to keep the incoming sync signal 
separate from MIDI data you're recording.  The "Receive sync port" 
item lets you do this.

Sync Source

The "Sync Source" radio buttons determine whether you'll use your 
computer's clock or an external MIDI device as TRAX's master 
clock.

If you won't be using an external MIDI sync source to control the 
playback of TRAX: Check Internal.

Your PC's internal clock will control TRAX's playback speed.

If you do want to "slave" TRAX's playback functions to an 
external source: Check External.

********************************************************
TRAX and Windows

This version of TRAX is designed to run with the Multimedia
Extensions to Windows 3.0 or with Windows 3.1. 

The Setup program creates a Program Manager group called "TRAX"
and several Program Manager items (icons) for the TRAX executable
program and sample files.

Several sample music files are included with TRAX. Some of the
files are authored and voiced according to authoring guidelines for
Multimedia PCs, where channels 1 through 10 are for Hi-End General
MIDI style sound modules, while channels 13 through 16 are for 
base-level Adlib, SoundBlaster or MediaVision style FM synth cards. 
The best way to get these files to sound good on your system is to 
play them back through a correctly configured MIDI Mapper. You can 
do this by selecting the MIDI Mapper as the output port in TRAX's 
MIDI Setup dialog. Alternativly, you can playback the base-level
channels directly to an Adlib sytle FM synth, by selecting the
corresponding output port in the MIDI Setup dialog and by soloing
the tracks that  are assigned to channels 13 through 16. Of course,
if you have a General MIDI synth, such as the Roland SC-55 Sound
Canvas connected to a MIDI out port, then you could solo all tracks
that are assigned to channels 1 through 10 and play them back
directly to the General MIDI synth.

The other sample music files that are included are generic enough
to sound good on just about any synth or sound module. These files
are not intended for multimedia purposes and will probably not 
sound right when played back through the MIDI Mapper.

************************************
TRAX - 
Sound Card and MIDI Interface Address and Interrupt settings

You can use the "Drivers" Applet in the Windows Control Panel
to adjust the settings that are used for your MIDI hardware.
Select the driver that you want to configure and then click on
the "Setup" button to change the port address and interrupt level.
If the driver that you need does not appear to be installed then
click on the "Add" button to install it.

You can also edit the SYSTEM.INI file directly using the Windows
SYSEDIT application.  Look for the section in the SYSTEM.INI that
contains the settings for your driver. If the driver is currently
using the default settings then you may have to add the section as
shown in the examples below:

; default settings for an MPU-401
[mpu401.drv]
port=330
int=2

; for Soundblaster or Media Concept MIDI
[sndblst.drv]
port=220
int=7

The first entry, for instance, will tell the Windows MIDI
driver to look for your MPU-401 on interrupt 2 at port
address 330. Check your card and its documentation for help
on finding out what these values are. The above values are
the defaults. You need only add an entry to your SYSTEM.INI
file if your values are different than these.

Windows provides a program which makes editing your
SYSTEM.INI file, and other system files, easy to do. It is
called SYSEDIT.EXE and can be found in your Windows system
directory. Add it to your Main group if you haven't done so
already. It is great to have around. Take care when you edit
these files, however. They must be just right for your
system to work. Keep backups around just in case.


***********************************
TROUBLE SHOOTING

-> If you get the message 'Out of environment space' when
   booting after installing TRAX, increase the
   environment size in your CONFIG.SYS file. The statement:

                shell=command.com /e:512 /p

   will most likely provide you with ample space. If not,
   increase the number after '/e:'.

-> If you get no MIDI I/O whatsoever, make sure that you have
   selected the correct MIDI ports in the MIDI Setup dialog. If
   you still get no MIDI I/O then make sure that the SYSTEM.INI
   settings are correct for your hardware. Check your card and
   its documentation to make sure of what the values are.
066 GRAF Tools V3.0 7×HD
数值绘图及分析,可绘制直方图,X-Y图,曲线,曲面,等值线图及自定义函数的图形,对数据做平滑,回归,插值FFT等处理
README.DOC [展开]
  ..................................................................    
  .                                                                .
  .  GRAFTOOL, Version 3.3                                         .
  .                                                                .
  .  November 19, 1990                                             .
  .                                                                .
  .                                                                .
  .   This "README" file provides additional information           .
  .   to supplement the manual for GRAFTOOL.                       .
  .                                                                .
  ..................................................................

   ENHANCED GRAPHICAL INTERFACE FOR COLOR EGA AND VGA MONITORS

   On the main screen, Graftool 3.3 has six new mode buttons, each
   identified with a graphical icon:

                     Mode             Icon
                     ---------------------------------
                     Add Graph........Column Chart
                     Zoom.............Magnifying Glass
                     Data Cursor......X,Y,Z Graph
                     Data Process.....Line & Dots
                     Formula Solver...E=mc2
                     Print Screen.....Printer

   These icon buttons give you simple, one-touch access to frequently used
   features.  Just click or enter on a button to activate the feature.  The
   succeeding paragraphs discuss each of these buttons.

                             ADD GRAPH BUTTON

   The Add Graph button will give you a selection of the 13 fundamental graph
   types that Graftool supports.  After selecting the button, select one of 
   the graph types displayed in the menu sidebar.  For more information on
   creating a graph, refer to Chapter 3, "Creating a Graph", in the User's
   Guide.

                                  ZOOM

   Graftool allows you to zoom up to 300 orders of magnification. By clicking
   on "Zoom" with the mouse, you will then be prompted to select the upper
   left corner of the area you want to zoom in on. Once that location is
   selected, you will then be asked to select the lower right corner of the
   rectangular area to be zoomed in on. For more information on zooming,
   refer to page 191 in the Graftool User's Guide.

                                DATA CURSOR

   The Intelligent Data Cursor is a set of crosshairs which travels along a
   curve or surface, displaying the value of the data points as it moves. The
   values are displayed in a readout at the bottom of the graph area.  For
   more information on the data cursor and how to use it, refer to Section
   4.3, page 195 in the User's Guide.

                               DATA PROCESS

   Graftool supports several data-processing functions which can be performed
   on-screen once a data set has been plotted.  By selecting this button with 
   the mouse, you will be given a selection of several types of processing
   functions.  Refer to Chapter 4, "Analyzing and Processing Data" for more
   information on the various analyzing and processing functions available.

                              FORMULA SOLVER

   By selecting Graftool's built-in Formula Solver, you are provided a quick
   and efficient way of evaluating a function or system of functions which
   define a given curve or surface.  Once defined, the equations and the
   resulting data are stored in an ASCII file, available for graphing. For
   more information on the Formula Solver, refer to section 4.13, page 247
   in the Graftool User's Guide.

                               PRINT PRINT

   By selecting the button with the printer diagram, a single printout of
   your present screen display will be immediately sent to the printer you
   have previously selected. For more information on printing and specifying
   various options for printing and exporting, refer to page 337 in the
   User's Guide.
 
   LOTUS 1-2-3 AND SYMPHONY SUPPORT

   Graftool now supports direct access of Lotus 1-2-3 and Symphony
   files.   Both WKS and WK1 files created by 1-2-3 Versions 1, 1A,
   and 2 and Symphony Versions 1.0 and 1.1 are supported.

   Before graphing the data from a Lotus spreadsheet, import the WKS
   or WK1 file using Graftool's spreadsheet FILE IMPORT command and 
   save the file as an ASCII data file (.DAT).  Then graph the newly-
   created data file.

   To export an ASCII data file back to a Lotus spreadsheet, use
   Graftool's spreadsheet FILE EXPORT command.

   PIC GRAPHICS FILE SUPPORT

   Graftool now supports the creation of .PIC files for export to
   other word processors and presentation graphics programs.  Since
   the PIC file format does not allow complex polygon fills, the
   Times and Modern fonts will be outlined only.  For best results,
   use the Simplex font.

   To export a graph created with Graftool, use the PRINT EXPORT command
   from the main menu and specify the output format as PIC.
067 GIF TOOLS 3×HD
068 TURBO SPACE 3×TD
原始 1.IMG 2.IMG 3.IMG
069 GRASP V4.0 4×HD
070 IMS Folder V2.00 3×HD
最佳图象预处理软件,支持TVGA 1024X768 256种颜色
071 Hijaak V2.1 2×HD
通用图象格式转换软件,支持30种图形图象,如PCX,TIF GIF,CUT,PIC,TGA,IMG,GEM,BMP,DXF,PGL及26种FAX格式互换.支持屏幕拷贝
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.IMG 2.IMG
072 Hijaak V1.0 2×HD
Hijaak的最新Windows版本
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.IMG 2.IMG
073 HIJAAK PRO FOR WINDOWS 3×HD
README.TXT [展开]
The following document files are available on-line to help you
install and run HJPRO:

B4Ustart.WRI_________________________________________________
This "Before you Start" file in Windows Write format is avail-
able by inserting the HiJaak PRO Install disk (Disk 1) into 
your a: (or b:) floppy drive and using Windows Write program 
to read the file "b4ustart.wri". B4ustart.wri contains hints
for solving install problems. To read this file, pull down 
the Program Manager File menu, click on Run..., and enter
the following command:
    WRITE a:B4UStart.wri
	-- or --
    WRITE b:B4UStart.wri 

TBLSHOOT.HLP_________________________________________________
This "Troubleshooting Help" file is available from the HiJaak 
PRO program group after you install. It contains tips, tricks
and workarounds for problems you might encounter using HiJaak
PRO. To read this file, double-click on the Troubleshooting
icon in the HiJaak PRO program group. If you don't see the 
icon, pull down the Program Manager File menu, click on Run...,
and type the following command:
     WINHELP c:\hjpro\tblshoot.hlp 
where c:\hjpro is replaced by your path to HiJaak PRO. You can
also use this command from the HiJaak PRO Install disk (Disk1)
to read the file before you install.


RELEASE.WRI__________________________________________________
This "Release Notes" file in Windows Write format is available 
from the HJPRO subdirectory after you install HiJaak PRO. It 
contains a HiJaak PRO "roadmap" for HiJaak for Windows users,
as well as information on new features in HiJaak PRO. Use 
Windows Write to print or read this file any time after 
installation.

NETWORK.WRI__________________________________________________
This "Networks" file is available from the HJPRO subdirectory 
after you install HiJaak PRO. It contains information to help
you set up HiJaak PRO on a network. To learn how to install 
HiJaak PRO on a network, see Chapter 1 of the HiJaak PRO 
User's Guide. Use Windows Write to print or read this file 
any time after installation.

APPNOTE.WRI__________________________________________________
This "Application Notes" file in Windows Write format is avail-
able from an icon in the HiJaak PRO program group after you 
install HiJaak PRO. It contains information on using HiJaak 
PRO with your applications.  Use Windows Write to print or 
read this file any time after installation.
原始 1.DDI 2.DDI 3.DDI
074 QIKDRAW 3×HD
075 SkeedStai 24X 2×HD
README.DOC [展开]
=========================================================================
=  SpeedStar 24X     README.DOC File                                    =
=                                                                       =
=                                                                       =
=  v1.02                                                                =
=========================================================================

Thank you for purchasing the SpeedStar 24X graphics accelerator card.  We
believe the SpeedStar 24X is THE state of the art, Windows processor
card and will prove to be an important part of your daily computing.

In order for you to configure the SpeedStar 24X for your daily use,
please read the SpeedStar 24X User's Manual before proceeding.

This disk contains a mouse driven installation program.  It will 
automatically unpack the SpeedStar 24X drivers to the specified 
directories on your hard drive.

To run the installation program, type:

   GO  [press Enter]



VDIAG.EXE - Video Diagnostics

A video diagnostics utility, called VDIAG, has been added to assist with
testing the operation of your SpeedStar 24X video card.  If problems in
video occur or as a routine check-up, execute the VDIAG program found
on SpeedStar 24X disk 1.  Be sure to set your monitor timings in the 
24XMODE.COM program or execute the 24XMODE MONITOR command line before 
testing video modes.  This will ensure that the color palette syncronizes 
on your monitor.


VESA.EXE - VESA v1.2 BIOS Extensions

A VESA BIOS Extension TSR called VESA.EXE has been included for programs
requiring v1.2 VESA compliance and protected mode applications that use
VESA as the video driver.  A future BIOS update will incorporate the 
protected mode update.
076 QPEG V1.1C 1×TD 50元
最快速的 JPEG和GIF 图象观察器,支持VESA标准.支持24BIT真彩色,自带Super VGA卡的VESA程序,支持多种类型的显示卡
077 Image Start II V2.0 1×HD
图象扫描软件,支持Microtek扫描器,Windows下运行
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.IMG
078 Image ASSISTANT For Windows 2×HD
README [展开]
Image Assistant 1.0 Release Notes

Black and White User Interface
The non-color interface will appear if you use a VGA monitor. If your 
monitor is capable of super-VGA, or you are using a higher-quality 
graphics card, be sure you have the correct driver selected in the 
Windows Setup program. Consult your video card documentation 
for driver and setup information.

Tutorial Error - page 12
Under "Using the Rectangle Auto Selection Feature" step 2, the 
tutorial asks you to press the Shift key-right mouse button to use 
the Auto Selection feature. You cannot use this feature if you have 
previousfƒƒƒ	ƒƒƒüαßαß<ƒ8	ƒƒα߃ƒ	ƒ	ƒ	ƒƒƒƒƒαß	ƒƒƒ	ƒƒƒ	ƒƒ	üƒ$ƒƒ	ƒα߃	âƒ	ƒ	ƒ	ƒâƒƒ		ƒƒƒƒα߃	ƒ	ƒƒ	ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ	ƒ		üƒαßαß3	ƒƒƒ<	α߃ƒƒƒ	ƒƒƒƒ			 shapes, a 
rectangular border appears around the total area - the actual 
pasted area is just a portion of the rectangular area. To drag the 
pasted area, your cursor must be in the shape of a hand and be 
located over the actual pasted area (not simply within the 
rectangle).

Canceling a Scan
To stop a scan in progress, press the ESC key. Clicking Cancel will 
not stop the scan.

Resizing an Image
You can add a border or extra space around an image by selecting 
Resample Options under the Image menu/Transform command. To 
add space for a border, select Change Work Area/Image Centered 
and add a value to the X and Y Size edit boxes on the right side of 
the dialog box.

Calibrating a Printer
When you calibrate your printer, you print the calchart.tif file. Print 
this chart without borders. An error message will appear if you scan 
a chart printed with borders.

Changing the Memory Setup
You can select different drives to act as virtual memory locations 
by choosing Memory in the Setup menu. A change in drives will go 
into effect when you restart the program.

Using the Spacebar for a Zoom Shortcut
While using the paint tools only, you can turn the cursor into a 
zoom tool by holding down the spacebar.

Using the Period Key for a Hand-tool Shortcut
While using the paint tools only, you can turn the cursor into a 
hand tool by holding down the period key.

Object Linking and Embedding
The Color Graphics Editor supports object, linking and embedding 
(OLE), a new feature of Microsoft Windows 3.1. OLE is a way to 
transfer and share information between applications. Images from 
Image Assistant can be embedded or linked into other documents. 
Support of this type for OLE is referred to as server support. For 
specific information and instructions for using OLE, refer to your 
Microsoft Windows 3.1 User's Guide. 

Save Printer Calibration Files
You can save your printer calibration files for when you later use a 
particular hardware configuration. For example, if you have access 
to two types of printers, you should calibrate your system 
separately with each one. Then, save the calibration file for each 
configuration. Reload the appropriate calibration file for each printer 
instead of recalibrating. The Save Calibration dialog box 
automatically opens after you complete the printer calibration 
steps. This feature is also available for scanner calibration. Refer 
to the Selecting Scanner section of the Installation Manual for more 
information. 
To use an existing printer calibration file: 
1. Choose Printer Setup in the File menu. 
2. Click Calibration file. 
3. Locate and load the appropriate calibration file. 4. Click OK to 
close the dialog box.
The currently selected calibration file will be listed below the 
Calibration file button. 
5. Click Use calibration file to use the listed file. 

HP DeskJet 500C Printer
To set up this printer to print in color, Select Printer Setup in the 
File menu. Highlight the DeskJet driver and click Setup.... The 
Printer Setup dialog box will appear: click Color... The Color Options 
dialog box will appear: select Color Blending/Advanced Pattern or 
Advanced Scatter.
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.IMG 2.IMG
079 IMAGE 256 2×HD
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.IMG 2.IMG
080 IMAGE ASSISTANT F/W 2×HD
README [展开]
Image Assistant 1.0 Release Notes

Black and White User Interface
The non-color interface will appear if you use a VGA monitor. If your 
monitor is capable of super-VGA, or you are using a higher-quality 
graphics card, be sure you have the correct driver selected in the 
Windows Setup program. Consult your video card documentation 
for driver and setup information.

Tutorial Error - page 12
Under "Using the Rectangle Auto Selection Feature" step 2, the 
tutorial asks you to press the Shift key-right mouse button to use 
the Auto Selection feature. You cannot use this feature if you have 
previousfƒƒƒ	ƒƒƒüαßαß<ƒ8	ƒƒα߃ƒ	ƒ	ƒ	ƒƒƒƒƒαß	ƒƒƒ	ƒƒƒ	ƒƒ	üƒ$ƒƒ	ƒα߃	âƒ	ƒ	ƒ	ƒâƒƒ		ƒƒƒƒα߃	ƒ	ƒƒ	ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ	ƒ		üƒαßαß3	ƒƒƒ<	α߃ƒƒƒ	ƒƒƒƒ			 shapes, a 
rectangular border appears around the total area - the actual 
pasted area is just a portion of the rectangular area. To drag the 
pasted area, your cursor must be in the shape of a hand and be 
located over the actual pasted area (not simply within the 
rectangle).

Canceling a Scan
To stop a scan in progress, press the ESC key. Clicking Cancel will 
not stop the scan.

Resizing an Image
You can add a border or extra space around an image by selecting 
Resample Options under the Image menu/Transform command. To 
add space for a border, select Change Work Area/Image Centered 
and add a value to the X and Y Size edit boxes on the right side of 
the dialog box.

Calibrating a Printer
When you calibrate your printer, you print the calchart.tif file. Print 
this chart without borders. An error message will appear if you scan 
a chart printed with borders.

Changing the Memory Setup
You can select different drives to act as virtual memory locations 
by choosing Memory in the Setup menu. A change in drives will go 
into effect when you restart the program.

Using the Spacebar for a Zoom Shortcut
While using the paint tools only, you can turn the cursor into a 
zoom tool by holding down the spacebar.

Using the Period Key for a Hand-tool Shortcut
While using the paint tools only, you can turn the cursor into a 
hand tool by holding down the period key.

Object Linking and Embedding
The Color Graphics Editor supports object, linking and embedding 
(OLE), a new feature of Microsoft Windows 3.1. OLE is a way to 
transfer and share information between applications. Images from 
Image Assistant can be embedded or linked into other documents. 
Support of this type for OLE is referred to as server support. For 
specific information and instructions for using OLE, refer to your 
Microsoft Windows 3.1 User's Guide. 

Save Printer Calibration Files
You can save your printer calibration files for when you later use a 
particular hardware configuration. For example, if you have access 
to two types of printers, you should calibrate your system 
separately with each one. Then, save the calibration file for each 
configuration. Reload the appropriate calibration file for each printer 
instead of recalibrating. The Save Calibration dialog box 
automatically opens after you complete the printer calibration 
steps. This feature is also available for scanner calibration. Refer 
to the Selecting Scanner section of the Installation Manual for more 
information. 
To use an existing printer calibration file: 
1. Choose Printer Setup in the File menu. 
2. Click Calibration file. 
3. Locate and load the appropriate calibration file. 4. Click OK to 
close the dialog box.
The currently selected calibration file will be listed below the 
Calibration file button. 
5. Click Use calibration file to use the listed file. 

HP DeskJet 500C Printer
To set up this printer to print in color, Select Printer Setup in the 
File menu. Highlight the DeskJet driver and click Setup.... The 
Printer Setup dialog box will appear: click Color... The Color Options 
dialog box will appear: select Color Blending/Advanced Pattern or 
Advanced Scatter.
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.DDI 2.DDI
081 IMAGE IN F/W 3×HD
README.TXT [展开]
===========================
Image-In v3.0 - 11 Nov 1991
===========================


Windows enhanced mode system configuration
------------------------------------------

If you are running Windows in 386 enhanced mode (this is recommended
for Image-In), you should read the section in the Microsoft Windows
User's manual about setting a permanent swap file. It is very
important to create a permanent swap file of at least 4Mb especially if
you have 4Mb or less memory in your machine.


Scanner supported
-----------------

This version supports the following scanners:

- ALPS 300
- AVR 1000 and 3000
- Canon IX-12, IX-12F and IX-30F
- Canon ION PC kit.
- Datacopy 730GS
- Epson GT-4000, GT-6000 (marketed in the US as ES-300C)
- Hewlett-Packard  Scanjet, Scanjet+ and Scanjet IIC.
- Microtek (all current models)
- Ricoh RS-3xx with ISI-8 or MSI-8 interface
- Ricoh RS-632 with ISI-8, MSI-8 or SCSI interface
- Ricoh FS1 (SCSI).
- Sharp JX-300 and JX-320
- UMAX (all current models)

  Before using Image-In with ALPS, AVR, Canon, HP, Sharp and
  UMAX scanners, you must install the scanner driver provided with the
  scanner. Follow the installation instructions in the scanner
  documentation.

DMA problems and certain scanners
---------------------------------

Certain scanners make use of the DMA, and problems may arise when
these scanners try to transfer big memory blocks to these areas.
If you get a Windows error message relating to the DMA buffer the
following line should be added in the SYSTEM.INI file in the Windows
sub-directory under the [386enh] section: 

DMAbuffersize=64


Compatibility problems between Image-In and some VGA cards
----------------------------------------------------------

If you are using a 16-color VGA configuration or another
16-color display adapter that includes VGA emulation, Image-In
will try to control the VGA hardware palette directly, so as to 
display gray-scale images in true gray scale mode. On certain 
systems you may get an altered screen display. To resolve this 
problem, the first step is to uncheck "Use VGA palette" in the 
view display dialog box. If you still have problems, add the line 

   vga=0

in the [display] section of the IMAGEIN.INI file.


Image-In temporary files
------------------------

Image-In creates a temporary file when there is not enough memory
to keep an image completely in memory. This file is created in the
same drive/directory as the other Windows temporary files. If there
is not enough disk space for the temporary file, you can select 
another drive by setting the TEMP environment variable. To do this,
put a line in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file as follows:

   SET TEMP=<drive>:\pathname


Using Adaptec SCSI drivers and Image-In
---------------------------------------

Currently, the following scanners use the adaptec SCSI driver:

Ricoh RS632
Ricoh FS1

The adaptec SCSI driver given with Image-In uses the following Adaptec
ASPI DOS driver:
	
 - ASPI4DOS.sys for 154x and 164x board,

 - ASPI2DOS.sys for 152x boards.

If you do not have this driver, contact your adaptec distributor to get one.

This device driver must be installed BEFORE the ASPISCSI.SYS (which is provided
on your Image-In disk) in your CONFIG.SYS file.

For example the following lines must be found (in this order) in your CONFIG.SYS
file:

device = [path]\aspi4dos.sys
device = [imagein3 path]\aspiscsi.sys

NOTE: If you have selected a SCSI scanner (and choosen the adaptec SCSI adapter), the
      ASPISCSI.SYS will be automatically added to your CONFIG.SYS file.
082 IMAGE PALS 1.2 F/W 3×TD
083 IMAGE WITH IMPACT F/W 3×HD
README.TXT
The images provided in this disk have been created by 3G Graphics--makers of 
high quality clip art for IBM/compatibles, and Macintosh computers. If you 
would like to receive a free brochure, or if you have any other questions 
about our products, you can call or write 3G Graphics: address-11410 
N.E.124th St., Suite 6155, Kirkland, WA  98034. Call toll-free at 800-456-
0234 (U.S.only),or at (206) 823-8198 (all other areas).
084 IMAGE WIZARD F/W 5×TD
README [展开]
********************************************************************
ImageWizard Version 1.02

This file contains important updates and corrections to the
documentation in your ImageWizard package. Please note 
the following information:
********************************************************************

Microsoft Windows:
-----------------------
ImageWizard version 1.02 requires Microsoft Windows 
version 3.1 or greater. Windows 3.0 is not supported.

Updated Drivers for Diamond Speedstar 24X Video Card:
-----------------------------------------------------------------
If you are using the Diamond Speedstar 24X video card,
updated drivers are available from Diamond which may resolve 
incompatibility problems with ImageWizard, the Multimedia
Wizard Guide, and other applications.

File Formats:
---------------
ImageWizard now provides write-only support for the Windows
Metafile (.WMF) file format. The Run Length Encoded file
format is supported for read-only. The Image (.IMG) file format 
is not supported. 

Opening Animation Sequence:
------------------------------------
If you wish to remove the opening animation sequence in 
ImageWizard, follow the directions on the ImageWizard
Uninstall card. However, if you wish to bring back the
opening animation sequence, you will have to re-install
ImageWizard. As an alternative, you could temporarily
disable the opening animation sequence by renaming
the intro.avi file, found in the Wizard 1.0 sub directory,
to (yourname).avi. Then, if you wish to use the animation 
sequence again, simply rename it back to intro.avi. 

Working Directory:
----------------------
ImageWizard automatically assigns a "working directory" to your 
ImageWizard program item in the Windows Program Manager.
It is important that you do not change this working directory; 
ImageWizard may not function properly if it is changed.

Scanners:
-----------
In order to use a GPIB-interface scanner with ImageWizard, you
will need to make sure that no other GPIB devices are hooked up 
to your computer when you scan.

Printers:
----------
ImageWizard supports the Kodak XL 7700 printer series 
using the GPIB-interface. ImageWizard does not support the 
SCSI-interface.

Mask:
--------
The Invert and None tools on the Area/Create Mask tool window
are available while you are creating a mask (that is, while
the Create Mask tool is depressed). This provides you with more
flexibility in creating a mask. 
-  Choose the Invert tool when you want to invert, or reverse, your
    current mask selection. 
-  Choose the None tool when you want to select all but a few of 
    the colors in the image for your mask. When you choose the
    None tool, the entire image will be selected for your mask.
    Then choose the Subtraction tool and select the colors of the 
    image you wish to subtract from the mask. 

You can also create an object based on your mask. Once you 
have created a mask that you are satisfied with, you can turn 
the portion of the image that is included in your mask 
into an object by doing the following:
  1.  Choose Turn Mask On from the Edit menu.
  2.  Choose Grab Object from the Area menu. 
Just as with all objects, the object will be surrounded by an 
outline of alternating red and white dashes. The Move tool on the
Object tool window will be automatically activated.

Distort:
---------
The Distort tool on the Object tool window is not functional
on computers without a math coprocessor (floating-point
processor). 486 DX computers include a math coprocessor.
Other computers, such as the 386 SX, 386 DX, and 486 SX, 
generally do not come with a math coprocessor. You can  
purchase a math coprocessor separately for these machines.

Multimedia Wizard Guide:
-------------------------------
If you are using a display driver with large fonts (some drivers
of 800 x 600 resolution or higher), Multimedia Wizard Guide
text may not fit properly on the page. We suggest you view the 
Multimedia Wizard Guide using a display driver with small, or
standard, fonts.

The Multimedia Wizard Guide uses the following fonts that are 
supplied with Windows: MS Serif, MS Sans Serif, and 
Times New Roman. If these fonts are removed from your system, 
the quality and legibility of the text will deteriorate.
085 IMAGIC ! F/W 4×HD
README.TXT [展开]
Kofax Image Processing Platform (KIPP) for MS-Windows 

RELEASE NOTES for KIPP Version 1.21.13: $Date:   19 Dec 1991 14:55:12  $

                                        Kofax Image Products
                                        3 Jenner Street
                                        Irvine, CA 92718
                                        (714)727-1733
                                        (714)727-3144 FAX
                                        (714)727-3538 BBS (Kofax Connection)

=========================
DOCUMENTATION CORRECTIONS
=========================

See Release Notes

====================
GENERAL INSTALLATION
====================

The installation program used to install KIPP, INSTALL, is
licensed software provided by Knowledge Dynamics Corporation.
INSTALL is Copyright (c) 1987 - 1989 by Knowledge Dynamics
Corporation which reserves all copyright protection worldwide.
INSTALL is provided to you for the exclusive purpose of
installing KIPP.

An installation procedure is provided for installing the KOFAX
drivers.  See the section "Installing the Driver Files" for
information on installing the drivers.

Install the files found in directory \WINDOWS in the DOS
execution "PATH" or in your Windows directory (ie. C:\WINDOWS).

After installing the KIPP files, you will need to modify your system.ini 
file in your Windows 3.0 directory.  Locate the section labeled 386ENH, and
add the line "device=VKFD.386" to take advantage of 386 enhanced mode.



===========================
INSTALLING THE DRIVER FILES
===========================

Required driver files:
---------------------
        INSTALL.EXE, KF9XDRV.EXE

Files required only for PS/2 installations:
------------------------------------------
        @7055.ADF


In the KIPP 1.2 release an installation utility has been provided 
to simplify driver installation. To install drivers for your system, 
invoke the INSTALL.EXE utility, and follow the instructions on the 
screen.  INSTALL.EXE will extract the compressed driver files from 
the KF9XDRV.EXE file and write the required files into the specified 
directory.  



==================
LOADING THE DRIVER
==================      


After running the INSTALL.EXE utility, a directory will exist on your
hard disk (c:\KOFAX by default) that will contain the file KF9X00.EXE.
When the KF9X00.EXE program is invoked, it will load the KIPP driver
onto your 9100/9200.  For automatic driver loading, the KF9X00.EXE should
be called from your autoexec.bat file at system initialization.


The following help and configuration data is available with the 
"KF9X00 -help" command:

Firmware and Configuration Loader for the KF9x00 Engines.
Copyright (c) Kofax Image Products, 1989-1991. All rights reserved.
Usage:   kf9xl <param1> ... <param15>  (to load only)
  or     kf9xc <param1> ... <param15> (to load & install)
<param1>  -f=<fname>   load firmware file <fname>
          -f=@<fname>  load firmware/config files listed in <fname> file
          -f=@         load list of firmware/config files in 'FWLOAD.FIL'
          -f           load firmware file 'FWLOAD.OUT'
<param2>  -l=<fname>   load configuration file <fname>
          -l=@<fname>  load firmware/config files listed in <fname> file
          -l=@         load list of firmware/config files in 'KFCLOAD.FIL'
          -l           load configuration file 'KFCLOAD.KFI'
<param3>  -g=<address> start adapter executing at specified address
          -g           start adapter executing at entry point or NMI vector
          -ng          do not start adapter after loading.
<param4>  -i=<iobase>  address adapter at specified io address (AT bus)
<param5>  -z=<intsel>  interrupt level assigned to adapter (AT bus)
<param6>  -p=<slotid>  select adapter slot (MC bus only).
          -pp=<val>    parallel printer port select for HP III (1-4).
          -ps=<val>    serial printer port select for HP III (1-4).
<param7>  -t           test adapter before loading using 'kf9xd.exe'
          -t=<fname>   test adapter before loading using <fname> program
<param8>  -j           it's a KF9100 adapter (no VRAM).
<param9>  -c           cumulative firmware load -- prior load(s) valid
<param10> -s=<val>     assign software interrupt (to install driver)
<param11> -lid=<val>   associate logical id <val=0..7> with current load
<param12> -lnm=<text>  associate text string with current load
<param13> -v or -q     verbose or quiet (very) load
<param14> -k           remove TSR from memory.
<param15> -h or ?      display help screen.
Switch prefix '-' and value separator '=' are optional.



Examples:  
           C> REM MUST CD TO KOFAX DIRECTORY BEFORE LOADING THE DRIVER
           C> CD C:\KOFAX

           C> REM INSTALL DRIVER 
	   C> KF9X00 
           Copyright (c) Kofax Image Products 1991. All rights reserved.
           KF9100/9200 1.21 Driver installed at 0x62

           C> REM UNINSTALL THE DRIVER
           C> KF9X00 -K
          

          
        
====================
NOTES - NEW FEATURES
====================
086 ICON ANIMATE FOR WINDOWS 1×HD
087 ICON FETTI FOR WINDOWS 1×HD
088 IMAGE-IN-COLOR FOR WINDOWS 3×HD
README.TXT [展开]
===========================
Image-In v3.0 - 11 Nov 1991
===========================


Windows enhanced mode system configuration
------------------------------------------

If you are running Windows in 386 enhanced mode (this is recommended
for Image-In), you should read the section in the Microsoft Windows
User's manual about setting a permanent swap file. It is very
important to create a permanent swap file of at least 4Mb especially if
you have 4Mb or less memory in your machine.


Scanner supported
-----------------

This version supports the following scanners:

- ALPS 300
- AVR 1000 and 3000
- Canon IX-12, IX-12F and IX-30F
- Canon ION PC kit.
- Datacopy 730GS
- Epson GT-4000, GT-6000 (marketed in the US as ES-300C)
- Hewlett-Packard  Scanjet, Scanjet+ and Scanjet IIC.
- Microtek (all current models)
- Ricoh RS-3xx with ISI-8 or MSI-8 interface
- Ricoh RS-632 with ISI-8, MSI-8 or SCSI interface
- Ricoh FS1 (SCSI).
- Sharp JX-300 and JX-320
- UMAX (all current models)

  Before using Image-In with ALPS, AVR, Canon, HP, Sharp and
  UMAX scanners, you must install the scanner driver provided with the
  scanner. Follow the installation instructions in the scanner
  documentation.

DMA problems and certain scanners
---------------------------------

Certain scanners make use of the DMA, and problems may arise when
these scanners try to transfer big memory blocks to these areas.
If you get a Windows error message relating to the DMA buffer the
following line should be added in the SYSTEM.INI file in the Windows
sub-directory under the [386enh] section: 

DMAbuffersize=64


Compatibility problems between Image-In and some VGA cards
----------------------------------------------------------

If you are using a 16-color VGA configuration or another
16-color display adapter that includes VGA emulation, Image-In
will try to control the VGA hardware palette directly, so as to 
display gray-scale images in true gray scale mode. On certain 
systems you may get an altered screen display. To resolve this 
problem, the first step is to uncheck "Use VGA palette" in the 
view display dialog box. If you still have problems, add the line 

   vga=0

in the [display] section of the IMAGEIN.INI file.


Image-In temporary files
------------------------

Image-In creates a temporary file when there is not enough memory
to keep an image completely in memory. This file is created in the
same drive/directory as the other Windows temporary files. If there
is not enough disk space for the temporary file, you can select 
another drive by setting the TEMP environment variable. To do this,
put a line in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file as follows:

   SET TEMP=<drive>:\pathname


Using Adaptec SCSI drivers and Image-In
---------------------------------------

Currently, the following scanners use the adaptec SCSI driver:

Ricoh RS632
Ricoh FS1

The adaptec SCSI driver given with Image-In uses the following Adaptec
ASPI DOS driver:
	
 - ASPI4DOS.sys for 154x and 164x board,

 - ASPI2DOS.sys for 152x boards.

If you do not have this driver, contact your adaptec distributor to get one.

This device driver must be installed BEFORE the ASPISCSI.SYS (which is provided
on your Image-In disk) in your CONFIG.SYS file.

For example the following lines must be found (in this order) in your CONFIG.SYS
file:

device = [path]\aspi4dos.sys
device = [imagein3 path]\aspiscsi.sys

NOTE: If you have selected a SCSI scanner (and choosen the adaptec SCSI adapter), the
      ASPISCSI.SYS will be automatically added to your CONFIG.SYS file.
089 IMAGE LAB FOR WINDOWS 1×HD
090 PIZAZZ V2.0 1×HD
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.IMG
091 PIZAZZ V4.0 1×TD
超级屏幕拷贝可支持36种显示方式及426种打印机,可生成PCX,TIF,PAGEMAKER,WORDPERFECT等格式的文件,可安装在DOS或WINDOWS下
092 PIZAZZ PLUS 2.0 2×DD
RAW 1.raw 2.raw
原始 1.DDI 2.DDI
093 GetCap V2.23 1×TD
画面狩猎者二代 , 全解密安装版
094 Scan module V1.3 1×HD
支持多种扫描器的驱动程序
README.TXT [展开]
           Addendum for Twain for Windows Scan Module User Guide 
           =====================================================

Version 1.1 release notice
==========================

This release provides Scaling Calculator capability.

The Scaling Calculator Command
 
The Scaling Calculator makes it easy to calculate the scaling percentage 
required to make the scanned image fit a certain size area. With the Scaling 
Calculator, you can set the final scanned image to just the output 
dimensions you need.

To open the Scaling Calculator, click on the Scaling Calculator button to the 
right of the Scaling slider control. The Scaling Calculator box appears.

The top half of the dialog box shows the Height and Width of the current 
image. The current image is the area outlined by the scanning frame when the 
dialog box is opened. The Scaling value shown is the current Scaling 
setting, and the Size is the size of the image file.

The botton half of the dialog box shows the dimensions of the image after 
changes in scaling are made. The Height, Width, Size and Scaling text boxes 
can be set to any value by highlighting the current value and entering a new 
one. The other values are updated automatically to match the new value.

You can enter new values in the Scaling text box until you find the value 
you want, or you can enter a new dimension value in the Height or Width text 
box and use the new Scaling value supplied by the calculator.

Note: The relationship of the With and Height does not change when using the 
Scaling Calculator. If you want to change only the Width or Hieght, you need 
to redraw the scanning frame to a new shape.

The unit of measurement for the dimensions can be set to inches, pixels, 
centimeters or millimeters. Set the unit with the list box in the Image 
Status Controls.

OK        To accept the values entered in the text boxes, click on the OK 
          button. The value of the scaling control is automatically updated.

Cancel    To cancel the changes, click the Cancel button.

Version 1.2 release notice 
==========================

This release implements internal ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) commands to 
ScanMaker II and ScanMaker IIxe.

Some leading software programs have been tested and confirmed functionally
well. Program names are listed below.


                 Application          Version        Supplier
          ======================    ============   =============
           Omnipage Professional                     Caere 

                PhotoFinish             1.0          Zsoft

                  WinRix                1.1          Rix Softworks


Version 1.3 release notice
==========================

From this release, effects of Filter, Mirror and Invert can be seen in 
the Scanner Display window while performing the Prescan command. Notices 
concerning inconveniencies appeared in the manual on pages 30 and 31 are 
lifted. 
 
Implements the Scan Material command for ScanMaker 35t and ScanMaker 45t.
This command is valid to ScanMaker II series scanners if the scanner is 
harnessed with Microtek's Transparent Media Adapter.

The Scan Material command

The Scan Material command allows you to scan in the slide (positive film) or 
the negative film. 

To choose the type of scan material, click on the Scan Material button aside 
the Scan Mode selection. The Scan Material dialog box appears.

Click to make your selection for the slide (the upper one), or the negative 
film (the lower one). Click OK as acceptance, or Cancel to abandon the 
choices you have made. Appearance of the Scan Material button displays your 
most recent selection.

Note: The Scan Material option is only available for the latest Microtek 
scanner models including ScanMaker 35t Slide Scanner and ScanMaker 45t 
Multiformat Film Scanner. For ScanMaker II series scanners, a transparent 
media adapter is required to enable this function. Operating ScanMaker II or 
ScanMaker IIxe with the transparent media adapter mounted, you have three 
scan material choices: the reflective document, the slide, and the negative
film. 


              Using the ScanMaker II with non-Twain applications
              ==================================================

The ScanMaker II for the PC comes with Scan Module, software that
allows the scanner to be used with Twain compliant applications.
You can also use the scanner with applications that are not yet
Twain compliant, such as Picture Publisher and WordScan, by
following these steps.

Non Twain-compliant applications require a file called MSCAN.SYS
to be copied onto the hard drive and then added to the CONFIG.SYS
file. However, the newer ScanMaker II scanners cannot but used
with the MSCAN.SYS driver. To use the ScanMaker II, you must use
the software driver called MSCSI.SYS, and then get the
application to work with that software driver. Please run INSTSYS.EXE
in the floppy disk to install MSCSI.SYS or follow the following instruction.

Part 1

The first step is to copy the file MSCSI.SYS to your hard drive.
Copy the file to the hard drive's main directory. If your hard
drive is Drive C, and your floppy is Drive A, then place your
floppy disk in the drive and enter:

COPY A:\MSCSI.SYS C:\

Once the file is in the root directory, add it to the CONFIG.SYS
file. To add the new line to the CONFIG.SYS file, you can use any
text editor such as EDLIN in DOS, or you can use the Windows
Notepad application. The new line should look like this:

device = MSCSI.SYS

After adding the line to CONFIG.SYS, reboot your computer.



Part 2

The ScanMaker II for the PC comes with Scan Module, software that
allows the scanner to be used with Twain compliant applications.
ScanMaker II scanners use a software driver called MSCSI.SYS.
Here is how to use the MSCSI.SYS driver with applications that
are not Twain compliant, and are expecting the MSCAN.SYS driver.
The MSCSI.SYS driver is fully backward compatible with the
MSCAN.SYS driver. However, the techniques used for setting the
address with MSCAN.SYS and MSCSI.SYS are different; MSCAN.SYS
uses I/O port addresses, such as 200 and 300, while MSCSI.SYS
uses memory address, like d400 and d000.  In addition, MSCSI.SYS
requires the SCSI ID number information.
When asked to enter the I/O port address, enter a code number
that represents the SCSI ID and memory address. For example, if
your ScanMaker II SCSI ID setting is at 6 and the interface card
address is set at dc00, you can find the correct address code in
the following table. Just find where the correct SCSI ID column
intersects with the row containing the interface card address. In
this example, the correct code is 60.
With some applications, you may be required to use a 3 digit
number for the I/O address, while the number codes in the table
below are only 2 digits. If this happens, simply put a "2" or "3"
at the beginning of the code number. So in the above example, the
"60" would become "260." The extra number at the beginning has no
effect on the code. It is used only to fool the application.


 Interface                 Scanner SCSI ID Number
    Card
      Addres    0      1      2      3       4      5      6
        s
      0xd400   06      05     04     03     02      01     00
      0xd000   16      15     14     13     12      11     10
      0xcc00   26      25     24     23     22      21     20
      0xc800   36      35     34     33     32      31     30
      0xe400   46      45     44     43     42      41     40
      0xe000   56      55     54     53     52      51     50
      0xdc00   66      65     64     63     62      61     60
      0xd800   76      75     74     73     72      71     70
         Table 1. The Address and SCSI ID Mapping Table




Part 3

After you have set up the scanner, you are ready to use the
ScanMaker II. If the application gives you the option of
selecting the ScanMaker II, then choose ScanMaker II. If the
ScanMaker II is not directly supported, you can choose a
different scanner model, such as the 600Z or the 300Z.

In the case of Picture Publisher, you should select "600Z." If
you are using WordScan, then choose "Microtek scanners (all)."

Once you have selected your scanner, you will be able to use it
inside the application.
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.IMG
095 PSD For Windows 1×HD
README.TXT [展开]


                     Paint Shop Pro Readme.txt file


                  Subject                          Page
                  -------------------------------------

                  Shareware...........................1

                  ASP Ombudsman Policy................1

                  Limited Warrany.....................2

                  Installing Paint Shop Pro...........3

                  The User's Manual...................4

                  Technical Support...................4

                  Distributing/Bundling...............4

                  Purchasing the Licensed Version.....5

                  Order Forms:
                    JASC, Inc.
                    PsL
                    PD-SERVICE-LAGE
                    The Thompson Partnership
                    BUDGETWARE



                          Definition of Shareware

Shareware distribution gives users a chance to try software before buying it.
If you try a Shareware program and continue using it, you are expected to
register. Individual programs differ on details -- some request registration
while others require it, some specify a maximum trial period. With
registration, you get anything from the simple right to continue using the
software to an updated program and a printed manual.

Copyright laws apply to both Shareware and retail software, and the
copyright holder retains all rights, with a few specific exceptions as stated
below. Shareware authors are accomplished programmers, just like retail
authors, and the programs are of comparable quality. (In both cases, there are
good programs and bad ones!) The main difference is in the method of
distribution. The author specifically grants the right to copy and distribute
the software, either to all and sundry or to a specific group. For example,
some authors require written permission before a commercial disk vendor may
copy their Shareware.

Shareware is a distribution method, not a type of software. You should find
software that suits your needs and pocketbook, whether it's retail or
Shareware. The Shareware system makes fitting your needs easier, because you
can try before you buy. And because the overhead is lower, prices are lower
also. Shareware has the ultimate money-back guarantee -- if you don't use the
product, you don't pay for it.


                           ASP Ombudsman Policy

This program is produced by a member of the Association of Shareware
Professionals (ASP).  ASP wants to make sure that the shareware principle
works for you. If you are unable to resolve a shareware-related problem with
an ASP member by contacting the member directly, ASP may be able to help. The
ASP Ombudsman can help you resolve a dispute or problem with an ASP member,
but does not provide technical support for members' products. Please write to
the ASP Ombudsman at 545 Grover Road, Muskegon, MI 49442-9427 or send a
Compuserve message via CompuServe Mail to ASP Ombudsman 70007,3536

                                    1



                   LIMITED WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY 
 
	THIS SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS (INCLUDING INSTRUCTIONS 
FOR USE) ARE PROVIDES "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. FURTHER, JASC,
INC.(JASC) DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE, OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING
THE USE, OR THE RESULTS OF USE, OF THE SOFTWARE OR WRITTEN MATERIALS IN TERMS
OF CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. IF
THE SOFTWARE OR WRITTEN MATERIALS ARE DEFECTIVE YOU, AND NOT JASC OR ITS
DEALERS, DISTRIBUTORS, AGENTS, OR EMPLOYEES, ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION.
 
	THE ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, 
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, THAT IS MADE BY JASC, ON THIS JASC PRODUCT.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY JASC, ITS DEALERS,
DISTRIBUTORS, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY
INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY AND YOU MAY NOT RELY ON ANY SUCH
INFORMATION OR ADVICE. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE.
 
	NEITHER JASC NOR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, 
PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THIS PRODUCT SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF
BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND
THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT EVEN IF
JASC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
 
	This Limited Warranty shall be governed and construed in accordance with 
the laws of the State of Minnesota. 
 


                           ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
 
BY USING THE SHAREWARE VERSION OF PAINT SHOP PRO YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU
HAVE READ THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS'
TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU ALSO AGREE THAT THE LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE
COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE PARTIES AND
SUPERSEDE ALL PROPOSALS OR PRIOR AGREEMENTS, ORAL OR WRITTEN, AND ANY OTHER
COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE PARTIES RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THE THE
LIMITED WARRANTY.


                                    2


                    Installating Paint Shop Pro

To install Paint Shop Pro, follow these steps:

  Before you can use Paint Shop Pro you have to run the setup program from
  Windows so it will work properly on your computer. You cannot just copy the
  files from the Paint Shop Pro disk to your hard disk. The files on the
  distribution disk are packed in a special way to save space. The setup
  program unpacks those files and builds them on your working disk.

  1. Make Windows' "Program Manager" the active window.

  2. From Windows' "Program Manager", select "File", then select "Run".  This
     will open the "Run" dialog box.

  3. Place the copy of Paint Shop Pro in your floppy drive.
     Now, the dialog box needs for you to type in the command that will run
     the Paint Shop Pro installation program.

     * If your floppy disk goes in your Drive "A", type:
              A:SETUP
       Leave the "Run Minimized" box un-selected, and click the "OK" command
       button.

     * If your floppy disk goes in your Drive "B", type:
              B:SETUP
       Leave the "Run Minimized" box un-selected, and click the "OK" command
       button.

  4. Fill in the required information in the dialog box.

     * It will ask you for the "Source Drive and Directory" designation where
       your Paint Shop Pro floppy disk is located.  (This is the same floppy
       drive designation you typed in the previous step before the word
       "setup".)

     * It will ask you for the hard disk "Destination Drive and Directory"
       designation on which you want it to install Paint Shop Pro.  It will
       suggest a directory named "C:\PSP".

       If you want the Paint Shop Pro program files installed on a different
       drive or directory, just click the pointer to the right of the
       characters you want to change, backspace over the ones you want to
       erase, then type in the new designation.

     * It will automatically build a Paint Shop Pro icon and add it to
       "Program Manager".  Accept the "Yes" (already selected by default) if
       you do want it to do this.  Select "No" if you do not.

  5. Paint Shop Pro Setup will unpack the necessary files and place them into
     your directory.

  6. Paint Shop Pro Setup will notify you when the installation is completed.

Paint Shop Pro is installed and ready to use.  Double click the pointer on
the Paint Shop Pro icon and try it out!
                                    3


                             The User's Manual

In order to keep the size of the Shareware version of Paint Shop Pro
reasonable no user's manual is provided. You will find that ALL menu items
and associated dialog boxes, along with general information, is provided on
line using the HELP-INDEX menu option of the program.

When you purchase the licensed version of Paint Shop Pro you will receive a
192 page, fully illustrated, perfect bound User's Guide.




                       Paint Shop Pro Technical Support

Technical support for Paint Shop Pro can be obtained from:

USA
---------
JASC, Inc.
17743 Evener Way
Eden Prairie, MN 55346 USA
(612) 934-7117 (9am to 5pm USA central time)


England
------------------------
The Thompson Partnership
Church Croft,
Bramshall,
UTTOXETER,
Staffs.
ST14 5DE
0889 564601



                            Distributing/Bundling

You are encouraged to pass a copy of the shareware verison of Paint Shop Pro
along to your friends for evaluation.

If you do so, you must provide them with the entire set of Paint Shop Pro
shareware version files. These include:

SETUP.EXE
PSP.CMP
README.DOC
VENDOR.DOC

Do not simply copy the files off your hard drive. Paint Shop Pro must be
installed using the SETUP program!

                                    4




                       Purchasing the Licensed Version

You may use the shareware version of Paint Shop Pro for a 30 day trial period.
If you would like to continue to use Paint Shop Pro after the 30 day trial
period, you are required to purchase the licensed version of Paint Shop Pro.

When you purchase the licensed version of Paint Shop Pro you will receive
a disk with the licensed version and the printed user's guide.

Paint Shop Pro may be purchased from a number of sources. You are free to
purchase your copy from where ever you desire. You may also want to check
with your local software store to see if they carry Paint Shop Pro.

The vendors include:


                     ENGLISH VERSION:
Budgetware                   - Australia
The Thompson Partnership     - England
The Public software Library  - USA
JASC, Inc.                   - USA (Purchase Orders, Site Licenses and Dealer
                                    Orders ONLY)


                     GERMAN VERSION:

PD-SERVICE-LAGE              - Germany



                                   5


                          JASC, Inc. (USA)
Credit card & check orders should be done through the Public software Library.

JASC, Inc. must be used for purchase orders, site licenses and dealer
ordering. Purchase Orders from outside the United States must be accompanied
by payment.

For site licenses and dealer ordering, please contact JASC, Inc. at
(612) 934-7117.

When sending a purchase order, please include the following form.

     Paint Shop Pro 1.0 (or latest version)

NAME______________________________________________

COMPANY___________________________________________

STREET____________________________________________

STREET____________________________________________

CITY______________________________________________

STATE_________________________     ZIP____________

COUNTRY_________________

TELEPHONE NUMBER_____________________

Paint Shop Pro..................................$49.00...______

Minnesota residents add 6.5% sales tax...................______

Shipping/Handling - US or Canada.................$4.00...______

Shipping/Handling - Outside of US or Canada.....$15.00...______
                                                       ==========

            Total in US Funds drawn on a US Bank.........______

Make checks payable to: JASC, Inc.

Mail to:
  JASC, Inc.
  17743 Evener Way
  Eden Prairie, MN 55346
  USA


                     Public software Library (USA)
You can order from the Public software Library by payment with check or
credit card. The credit cards accepted are: MC, Visa, American Express
or Discover.
The numbers for ordering are: (THESE NUMBERS ARE FOR PLACING AN ORDER ONLY!)
1-800-242-4775 or 1-713-524-6394, FAX: 1-713-524-6398, CIS: 71355,470

When ordering, please tell the operator you are ordering part number 10286.

Please use this form when ordering by mail.


Paint Shop Pro 1.0 (or latest version) - Part #: 10286

NAME______________________________________________

COMPANY___________________________________________

STREET____________________________________________

STREET____________________________________________

CITY______________________________________________

STATE_________________________     ZIP____________

COUNTRY_________________

TELEPHONE NUMBER__________________________

CREDIT CARD TYPE__________________________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER________________________

EXPIRATION DATE___________________________


Paint Shop Pro..................................$49.00...______

Texas residents add 8.25% sales tax......................______

Shipping/Handling - US or Canada.................$4.00...______

Shipping/Handling - Outside of US and Canada....$15.00...______
                                                       ==========

            Total in US Funds drawn on a US Bank.........______

Make checks payable to: PsL
Mail to:
 PsL
 P.O. Box 35705
 Houston, Texas 77235-5705
 USA


                           PD-SERVICE-LAGE (Germany)

                             GERMAN VERSION ONLY!!

You can order the German version from PD-SERVICE-LAGE by completing the
order form and mailing it and a check to PD-SERVICE-LAGE.

    Paint Shop Pro 1.0 (or latest version)

NAME______________________________________________

COMPANY___________________________________________

ADDRESS___________________________________________

ADDRESS___________________________________________

TOWN______________________________________________

CITY______________________________________________

COUNTY:_____________________ POST CODE____________

TELEPHONE NUMBER_____________________


Paint Shop Pro..(German version)..........116.00 DM...______

Shipping/Handling - Germany.................9.00 DM...______

Shipping/Handling - Outside of Germany.....18.00 DM...______
                                                    ==========

                                        Total.........______

Your total should be 125 DM for Germany Residents or 134 DM for Non-Germany
residents.

Make cheques payable to: PD-SERVICE-LAGE

Mail to:
 PD-SERVICE-LAGE
 Postfach 1743
 4937 Lage/Lippe
 West Germany


                The Thompson Partnership (England)

You can order from The Thompson Partnership by payment with cheque or
credit card. The credit cards accepted are: MC and Visa.

The number for ordering is: 0889 564601 (Voice or FAX)

Please use this form when ordering by mail.

     Paint Shop Pro 1.0 (or latest version)

NAME______________________________________________

COMPANY___________________________________________

ADDRESS___________________________________________

ADDRESS___________________________________________

TOWN______________________________________________

CITY______________________________________________

COUNTY:_____________________ POST CODE____________

TELEPHONE NUMBER__________________________

CREDIT CARD TYPE__________________________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER________________________

EXPIRATION DATE___________________________

Paint Shop Pro (Shipping/Handling/VAT included)...£39.00 (UK Pounds)

Make cheques or EuroCheque payable to: The Thompson Partnership
(remember to put your card number on the reverse of the cheque)

Mail to:
 The Thompson Partnership
 Church Croft,
 Bramshall,
 UTTOXETER,
 Staffs, England
 ST14 5DE

                           BUDGETWARE (Australia)

You can order from BUDGETWARE by payment with check or credit card.
The credit cards accepted are: MC, Visa, or Bankcard.
The numbers for ordering are: (THESE NUMBERS ARE FOR PLACING AN ORDER ONLY!)
(02) 519-4233, FAX: (02) 516-4236
International Numbers: +61 2 519-4233, FAX: +61 2 516-4236

Please use this form when ordering by mail.

    Paint Shop Pro 1.0 (or latest version)

NAME______________________________________________

COMPANY___________________________________________

ADDRESS___________________________________________

ADDRESS___________________________________________

TOWN______________________________________________

CITY______________________________________________

COUNTY:_____________________ POST CODE____________

TELEPHONE NUMBER_____________________

CREDIT CARD TYPE__________________________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER________________________

EXPIRATION DATE___________________________


Paint Shop Pro...............................$79.00 Australian..______

Shipping/Handling - Outside of Austrailia....$15.00 Australian..______
                                                              ==========

                                                  Total.........______

Make cheques payable to: BUDGETWARE
Mail to:
  BUDGETWARE
  P.O. Box 496
  Newtown NSW 2042
  Australia
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.IMG
096 TVGA 256 BGI 1×HD
README [展开]
			 Welcome to TVGA256 BGI
			 ----------------------

  This README file contains important information about TVGA256 BGI.
  TVGA256 BGI Driver support all TVGA 8900's 256 color mode(320*200,
  640*400, 640*480, 800*600, 1024*768), support Borland series Compiler
  such as Turbo C,Turbo C++, Borland C++, Turbo Pascal, Turbo Prolog.
  We give some examples for C, C++, and Pascal.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
-----------------
1.  How to Get Help
2.  Installation
3.  Features

 1. HOW TO GET HELP
-------------------
    If you have problem using this BGI, please Write to us at the
    following address:

      Ji tian, Wang
      No. 164, Road JingShi
      ShanDong Prov. Applied Technology Devolping Corp.
      Ji'Nan, ShanDong prov.
      Zip: 250002
      Tel: (0531)-623175

 2. IMPORTANT INFORMATION
-------------------------
    TVGA256 BGI driver support all functions defined in Turbo Pascal,
    Turbo C, Turbo Prolog, but has some difference:
      function
	setwritemode(writemode)
      Now support all drawing function,not only line.
      we support a demostraction program named WRTMODE.EXE,it demostrates
    the XOR mode write of Line, Circle, Bar3d, OutText, etc.
 3. FILES ON DISK
 _________________
   1. README   COM	UTILITY TO READ THIS FILE
   2. UNZIP    EXE	UTILITY TO UNPACK THE PACKED FILE(.ZIP FILE)
   3. TVGA256  ZIP	TVGA256 BGI DRIVER PACKAGE
      TVGA256  BGI	BGI FILE FOR TVGA 256
      TVGA256	 H	HEADER FOR TVGA256
      TVGA256  OBJ	OBJECT FILE OF BGI DRIVER FOR LINK INTO EXE FILE
      DETTVGA  OBJ	Detect function for tvga256 bgi driver
   4. CDEMO    ZIP	C DEMOSTRACTION
       BGIT	C	Example of tvga256 color demostration
       BGIT    EXE	RUN FILE OF BGIT.C
       BGIT1   MAK	MAKE FILE OF BGIT1.C,ETC
       BGIT1	C	Example of tvga256 color demostration with BGI driver
			and font linked into exe file
       BGIT1   EXE	RUN FILE OF BGIT1.C
       LITT    OBJ	bgi font object file used by bgit1.obj
       GOTH    OBJ
       SANS    OBJ
       TRIP    OBJ
       WRTMODE EXE	Write mode demostration
       CIRCLE  EXE	Circle demostartion
   5. PDEMO    ZIP	Pascal demostarction compression file
       PDEMO   PAS	source file of tvga256 demostraction
       PDEMO   EXE	execution file of pdemo.pas
       LOAD256 EXE	example of load a image file
       PAAA    256	Data file of load256.exe
       PAAB    256
       PAAC    256
    6. BGIT1   EXE	UNPACKED EXECUTION FILE OF BGIT1.EXE
    7. LOAD256 EXE	UNPACKED FILE OF LOAD256.EXE
    8. ASE     COM	used for demostration to emulate key press
    9. README		This file!
097 C-TVGA 256 BGI 1×HD
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.IMG
098 Flow Charting II+ V2.43 1×HD
流程图绘制软件
README [展开]

                              FLOW CHARTING II+

                                Version 2.43

                              Manual Supplement

                 --------------------------------------------

   This file contains additions and/or corrections to the Flow Charting
Manual.


What's New
------------

----) Mouse Menus (----

Mouse support is now built into Flow Charting, complete with popup menus.
The mouse interface is described in the manual, Section IX Mouse Operation,
or in the file, MOUSE.INS, and can be read by typing:

   README <return>

and then selecting "Read Mouse Instructions".


----) HP Portable Plus (----

Flow Charting will now work on the Hewlett-Packard Portable Plus computer
and the ThinkJet (HP-IL version).  The Micro style of text now works
properly on the Portable Plus.


----) Enhanced Graphics Adaptor (EGA) (----

Flow Charting now supports the high-resolution modes of the IBM Enhanced
Graphics Adaptor or compatibles.  The EGA must have at least 128K of memory,
and can use the color or monochrome monitor.  This new support will allow
you to view four times as much as before - 80 columns and 40 lines.


----) Hercules InColor (----

Flow Charting also supports the new, high-resolution color card from
Hercules.


Changes to Manual
-------------------

----) Xray Mode (----

When you want to repair shapes that already have text in them, you can
re-insert the same shape over the old one (without destroying the text).
This new feature is called "Xray Mode" and it is available by typing Alt-X
while in Shape Mode.  When you are in Xray mode, you will be able to see right
through the shape (hence the title) to whatever lies underneath.  You can turn
Xray mode off by hitting Alt-X again.


----) Protected Text Entry (----

The manual states that the only way to keep from writing over your shapes is
to be in auto-centering mode.  This is not entirely true.  You can also
protect your shapes by having the insert state on (INS key).  Please refer to
the manual to learn more about the INS key.


----) Hercules Compatibles (----

Please note that some Hercules compatible graphic cards are not necessarily
100% compatible.  If you get strange results or your monitor goes crazy,
Flow Charting may not recognize that you have a Hercules card installed.
To remedy this situation, each time you run Flow Charting you can specify
that a Hercules compatible is installed by typing:

   FLOW HERC <return>


----) Tandy 1000's (----

The Tandy 1000 computer has a hardware incompatibility which makes the Ctrl or
Alt keys seem to "stick".  To prevent this from occurring, Tandy 1000 users
should turn off the sound.  You can do this at the Configure Menu.  If you
prefer to leave the sound on, you can undo the "sticking" by pressing the Ctrl
or Alt key again.



=================

(9/11/87)
Below is a list of printers that should work with Flow Charting II+.
According to their manufacturers, each of these printers are compatible
with a printer that Flow Charting II+ supports.  On the left is
the manufacturers name and model name, on the right is the printer(s)
that Flow Charting II+ must be configured for.  Note: None of these
printers have been tested by Patton & Patton Software Corp., therefore
their compatibility with Flow Charting II+ cannot be guaranteed.  It would
be deeply appreciated that if you find one of these that works correctly
with Flow Charting II+, that you inform us either by phone or mail.

Send any questions or concerns to:
	Patton & Patton Software Corp.
	81 Great Oaks Blvd.
	San Jose,  CA  95119
	Attn: Technical Support Dept


      Alps
      ----

      P2000               132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      P2100               132 col     18 pin      Epson FX-100
      ALQ324              132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
      ALQ218               80 col     18 pin      Epson FX-185
      ALQ224               80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
      P2424C              132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500


      AST
      ---

      TurboLaser           80 col     Laser       Epson FX-80


      AT&T
      ----

      477                 132 col     24 pin      IBM Proprinter XL
      478                  80 col      9 pin      IBM Proprinter
      479                 132 col      9 pin      IBM Proprinter XL


      Blaser Ind.
      -----------

      The Blaser           80 col     Laser       IBM Proprinter


      Blue Chip Electronics
      ---------------------

      M120/NLQ             80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80
      M120-10              80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80

      Brother
      -------

      M-1109               80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80
      M-1509              132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      M-1709              132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      M-1724L             132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ-1000
      2024L               132 col     24 pin      Epson FX-185 (LQ?)
      Twinriter 5         132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-185


      Cal-Abco
      --------

      Legend 1080 A         80 col     9 pin      Epson RX-80
      1380                  80 col     9 pin      Epson RX-80

      Canon
      -----

      A-60                  80 col    18 pin      Epson FX-80
      A-65                 132 col    18 pin      Epson FX-100

      Centronics
      ----------

      Prinstation 260     132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100 / IBM 5182


      CIE
      ---

      Tri-Printer 4000 M20 132 col     9 pin      Epson FX-100
      Lips 10               80 col     Laser      HP Laserjet+


      Citizen
      -------

      MSP-10 / 20          80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80
      MSP-15 / 25         132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      MSP-120D             80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80 / IBM Graphics
      1200                 80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80
      MSP-50 / 55          80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80
      Tribute 124          80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ, Tosh. 351
      Tribute 224         132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ, Tosh. 351


      C.Itoh
      ------

      Prowriter Jr.        80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80

      Prowriter
       C210 / C215XP      80 col      9 pin       Epson FX-80
       C310P/R / C315XP   80 col      9 pin       Epson FX-80
       C310P/R / C315P/R 132 col      9 pin       Epson FX-100
       C-715 Reliant     132 col     24 pin       Epson LQ-1000, Tosh. 351
       C-815 Supra       132 col     24 pin       IBM Pro. XL, Tosh. 351

      Copal (USA)
      -----------

      Write Hand 5900    132 col     18 pin       IBM Pro. XL
      Write Hand 1200     80 col      9 pin       IBM Pro. XL, Epson FX
      Write Hand 1500     80 col      9 pin       IBM Pro. XL, Epson FX
      Write Hand 5500    132 col      9 pin       IBM Pro. XL, Epson FX
      Write Hand 6700    132 col     24 pin       Epson LQ (?)


      Cordata
      -------

      LP300 Desktop Printshop         Laser       Epson MX-80


      DataProducts Corp.
      ------------------

      9000 series       80/132 col   24 pin       Epson LQ


      DataSouth Computer Corp.
      ------------------------

      DS2200              132 col     9 pin       Epson FX-100


      Data Technology Corp.
      ---------------------

      Crystal Paint VIII   8ppm       Laser   1.5meg   HP LJ+ (standard)


      Digital Equipment Corp (DEC)
      ----------------------------

      210 Letterprinter   132 col     9 pin       Epson MX-80


      Diconix
      -------

      150                  80 col     Inkjet      Epson FX-80


      Facit
      -----

      B3100                80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80
      B3350               132 col     18 pin      Epson FX-100
      C7500               132 col     18 pin      Epson FX-100
      B3150C              132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      B3350C              132 col     18 pin      Epson FX-100
      4513                 80 col     Inkjet      Epson FX-80


      Fortis
      ------

      DH-45               132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      DM1310               80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-85
      DM2010               80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-85
      DM2015              132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-185


      Fujitsu
      -------

      DX2100 / DX2200  80/132 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Proprinter
      DX2300 / DX2400  80/132 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Proprinter
     *DL2400              132 col     24 pin      Epson FX-100
     *DPL24C / DL2600  80/132 col     24 pin      Epson FX-100
     *DL3300 / DL3400  80/132 col     24 pin      Epson FX-100
     *DL5600              132 col     24 pin      Epson FX-100

     * Try configuring for an Epson LQ1500 printer. A user reported that this
       driver works fine.

      General Electric
      ----------------

      3-8100               80 col     Thermal     Epson FX-80


      Genicom
      -------

      1020                 80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80
      1025                132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      3210                 80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics
      3310                 80 col      9 pin      IBM 5182
      5010 (laser)         80 col     Laser       HP Lasetjet+ (optional)


      IBM
      ---

      4207 Proprinter X24  132 col	  24 pin	  IBM Proprinter
	4208 Proprinter XC24 132 col	  24 pin	  IBM Proprinter


      Imagen Corp.
      ------------

      Imagen Innovator ImageStation   Laser       Epson FX-80


      JDL
      ---

      750e                132 col     24 pin      Epson FX-100
      850 EWS             132 col     24 pin      Epson FX-100
      850 GLT             132 col     24 pin      Epson FX-100


      Juki
      ----

      5510                 80 col      9 pin      IBM 5182


      Mannesman Tally
      ---------------

      MT85 / 86        80/132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100 / IBM Graphics
      MT87 / 88        80/132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100 / IBM Graphics
      MT90                 80 col     InkJet      IBM Graphics
      MT290               132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100 / IBM Graphics
      MT330               132 col     24 pin      Epson MX-100 / IBM Graphics
      MT460               132 col      9 pin      Epson MX-100 / IBM Graphics
      MT490               132 col     18 pin      Epson MX-100 / IBM Graphics
      MT910sl              80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet+ (selectable)


      Micro Peripherals Inc.
      ----------------------

      PrintMate 350       132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      5X Printer           80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80


      NEC
      ---

      Pinwriters
         P2                80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics
         P3               132 col      9 pin      Epson MX-100 / IBM Graphics
      
         P5 models
          P560             80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          P565            132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          P560XL           80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          P565XL          132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
      
         P6 models
          P660             80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          P665            132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          P760             80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          P765            132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          CP660            80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          CP665           132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          CP760            80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
          CP765           132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500

         LC800 models
          LC810            80 col     Laser       IBM Proprinter
          LC815            80 col     Laser       IBM Proprinter
          LC850            80 col     Laser       IBM Proprinter
          LC886            80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet+


      OmniLaser series 2000
          2015             80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet (standard)
                                                  HP Laserjet+ (optional)
          2100             80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet+
          2115             80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet 500+

      P2200                80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ2500


      Nissho
      ------

      NP-910              132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      NP-2405             132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
      NP-2410             132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500


      North Atlantic Ind.
      -------------------

      7075 / 7085          80 col      9 pin      Anadex (9625), Epson MX-80


      Oasys
      -----

      LaserPro 810-R       80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet+


      Okidata
      -------

      ML294               132 col     18 pin      Okidata 293

      Laserline 6       Basic Module    128k      HP Laserjet
                        Basic Module    512k      HP Laserjet+
                        Advanced Mod.   512k      HP Laserjet+


      Olivetti
      --------

      DM280                80 col      9 pin      IBM Proprinter


      Olympia
      -------

      NP30                 80 col      9 pin      Epson MX-85
      NP80                 80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Epson MX-80
      NP136               136 col      9 pin      Epson MX-100 / IBM Graphics


      Output Technology
      -----------------

      OT-700e             132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      OT-700n TriMatrix   132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      850 XL              132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      850 PrintNet        132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      888 XL              132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      889 XL              132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100


      Panasonic
      ---------

      KX-P1080i            80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Epson MX-80
      KX-P1091i            80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Epson MX-80
      KX-P1092             80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Epson FX-80
      KX-P1093            132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      KX-P1585            132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      KX-P1595            132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100
      KX-P1524            132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ


      Personal Computer Products, Inc.
      --------------------------------

      LaserImage 2000      80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet


      Phillips Information Systems
      ----------------------------

      GP 300LC            132 col     18 pin      Epson FX-100


      Printronix
      ----------

      S7024 / S7024C       80 col      9 pin      IBM Proprinter (w/ interface)
      P1013                80 col      9 pin      Epson LQ1500 (w/ interface)
      L1012                80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet+ (w/ interface)


      Quadram
      -------

      QuadLaser            80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet+


      QMS
      ---

      Kiss                 80 col     Laser       Epson FX-80
      Big Kiss             80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet (optional)
      SmartWriter          80 col     Laser       Epson FX-80
      Kiss Plus            512k       Laser       Personality 10 = Epson FX80
                           1 meg      Laser       Personality 20 = HP LJ+
                           2.5 meg    Laser       Personality 30 = same 10 + 20

      Qume
      ----

      LaserTen             80 col     Laser       HP Laserjet+


      RCA
      ---

      VP2100               80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80


      Ricoh
      -----

      PC Laser 6000                    Laser      - not compatible -


      Seikosha
      --------

      BP-5420AI           132 col      8 pin      Epson FX-100
      BP-5420FA           132 col      8 pin      Epson FX-100
      SP-1000I             80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics
      SP-1200 (AS)         80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Epson FX-80
      SP-180AI             80 col      9 pin      Epson JX-80
      SK-3000AI            80 col      9 pin      Epson JX-80
      SK-3005AI           132 col      9 pin      Epson JX-80 (FX-100)
      SL-80AI              80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ800
      MP-1300AI            80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Epson FX-80
      MP-5300AI           132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100 / IBM Graphics 


      Star Micronics
      --------------

      NB24-10              80 col     24 pin      Epson LQ800
      NB24-15             132 col     24 pin      Epson LQ1500
      NX-10                80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Epson FX-80
      NX-15               132 col      9 pin      Epson FX-100 / IBM Graphics
      NR-15                80 col      9 pin      IBM Graphics / Epson FX-80


      Tandy
      -----

      DMP-130A            132 col      9 pin      IBM Proprinter XL
      DMP-440             132 col      9 pin      IBM Proprinter XL
      DMP-2110            132 col     24 pin      IBM Proprinter XL
      DMP-2120            132 col     24 pin      IBM Proprinter XL


      Texas Instruments
      -----------------

      810                  80 col      9 pin      Epson MX-80
      850XL                80 col      9 pin      Epson MX-80
      857                  80 col      9 pin      Epson FX-80
      860XL               132 col      9 pin      IBM Proprinter XL
      880                 132 col      9 pin      IBM Proprinter XL
      885                  80 col      9 pin      IBM Proprinter

      Toshiba
      -------

      PageLaser12          80 col     Laser       IBM Graphics (standard)
                                                  HP Laserjet 500+ (optional)
原始 1.IMG GAMEBOY
099 Flow Charter V1.0 1×HD
流程图绘制软件
README.TXT [展开]
================================================================================
                         ABC FLOWCHARTER 1.01   (RELEASE DATE: 1/9/90)
================================================================================

{Changes to User's Guide}
p.24
The documentation says:
- Choose Hide palette from the Shape menu, or press [F9].
The documentation should say:
- Choose Hide palette from the Options menu, or press [F9].

p.29 
[Add note]
Thick border widths do not work with dash, dot, or dash-dot
border styles. To use thicker borders, use the solid style.

p36
[Add note]
Thick line widths do not work with dash, dot, or dash-dot 
line styles. To use thicker lines, use the solid style.

 

{Exporting charts}
The Export chart command saves a chart in the Windows metafile
format. This file can be read by Aldus Pagemaker and other Windows
applications.

{Additional messages; pp.111-115}
The following are additional ABC messages not found in the manual:
"There is already a chart with this name."
You are trying to rename a chart with the same name as an existing
chart. Every chart must have a unique name.
Type a name that is not used in the document.

"You must complete edit before closing a chart."
You cannot close a chart or quit ABC while editing.
Complete the edit before trying to close the chart.

"Spacing value too large. (Some shapes will be out of chart area.)"
The spacing value you are using to space shapes will move some of 
the shapes out of the chart area.
Use a smaller value to space the shapes.


{Notes for plotter users}
Most plotters are not capable of the following features. It is a 
good idea to test these features on your particular plotter before
attempting to use them.

Shadows. Shapes with shadowing may appear as solid black objects
instead of having the intended shadowing effect.

Patterns. The pattern may be omitted from the shape.

Lines. Lines may appear to go "over" a shape instead of behind it.
Draw lines around shapes if possible.

Opaque text. Text with opaque background may use transparent
background instead.

Overlapping shapes. If shapes overlap, the top shape may not cover
the shapes beneath it.


{Master item font}
The font used for master items can be changed by making an entry
in the WIN.INI file under the heading [ABC Flowcharter]. This 
heading appears after the first time you run ABC.

The entry should have the following form:
Font5=[FONT NAME],[POINT SIZE],[STYLE OPTION]

For example,
Font5=Helv,10,0

The style option can be set as follows:
0 - No style
1 - Bold
2 - Italic
4 - Underline
8 - Strikeout
To combine styles, just add the numbers for the styles you want.
For example, 6 gives you Italic and Underline.

You should make sure the font, size and style you choose is 
available on your printer.

================================================================================
                               END OF README.TXT
================================================================================
RAW 1.raw
原始 1.IMG
100 Flow Charter V2.0 2×HD
流程图绘制软件,在中文WINDOWS下可使用汉字)
ESC返回光盘列表 100 个软件 · CD 11